Home/Cadillac/Escalade/Cadillac Escalade GMT800 (2001-2006)/Repair manual/Testing & Diagnostics/Engine Controls - Self-Diagnostics - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L - Fl…
Contents Wiring diagrams Section: Testing & Diagnostics All sections

Engine Controls - Self-Diagnostics - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L - Flex Fuel & Gasoline Cadillac Escalade GMT800

Testing & Diagnostics 233 illustrations ~55599 words

MODEL IDENTIFICATION

Vehicle model is identified by the fifth character of Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). VIN is stamped on metal pad on top of left end of instrument panel, near windshield. See MODEL IDENTIFICATION table.

Series (1)Model
"C"2WD Avalanche, Escalade, Sierra, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Yukon & Yukon XL
"K"AWD/4WD Avalanche, Escalade, Escalade ESV, Escalade EXT, Sierra, Silverado, Suburban, Tahoe, Yukon & Yukon XL
"N"Hummer H2
(1) Vehicle series is fifth character of VIN.
(1)Vehicle series is fifth character of VIN.

MODEL IDENTIFICATION

INTRODUCTION

To properly diagnose and repair this vehicle, follow DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT - ENGINE CONTROLS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) are present and a no-start condition exists, proceed to NO-START DIAGNOSIS in BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES - "C", "G", "H", "K", "N", "S" & "T" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE article. If no DTCs are present and a driveability condition exists, proceed to TROUBLE SHOOTING - NO CODES - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L "C", "G", "H", "K", "N", "S" & "T" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE article for diagnosis by symptom (i.e., ROUGH IDLE, ENGINE STALLS, etc.).

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS

PCM is equipped with a self-diagnostic system which detects system failures or abnormalities. When a malfunction occurs, PCM will store a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) and, in most cases, illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) located on instrument cluster.

There are 2 paths for accessing on-board diagnostics. It is necessary to access information through both paths, as each path presents some different information.

  1. Generic OBD-II This provides all generic codes and some OEM codes, serial data PIDs required for generic OBD-II and some OEM PIDs, monitor status, pending codes and freeze frame.
  2. OEM All DTCs, all PIDs, failure records, enhanced scan tool information and all other OEM scanner functions.

Code Types

There are 3 types of DTC categories

  1. Type "A" Emissions related. Illuminates MIL the first time DTC sets.
  2. Type "B" Emissions related. Illuminates MIL if fault is active for 2 consecutive driving cycles.
  3. Type "C" Non-emissions related. Does not illuminate MIL, but may illuminate a SERVICE light.

Freeze Frame/Failure Records

PCM stores one freeze frame record (failure record "0") for the first failed test that sets a DTC and illuminates MIL. Freeze frame will not be overwritten unless a misfire or fuel trim DTC is set. Failure records are stored when any DTC is set. Six additional failure records can be stored in PCM. Failure records will be stored for all types of codes, whether or not the MIL is illuminated. If more than 6 DTCs are set, oldest DTC is deleted as newest DTC is stored. Typical failure record data includes

  1. Air/fuel ratio.
  2. Airflow rate.
  3. Fuel trim.
  4. Engine speed.
  5. Engine load.
  6. Engine coolant temperature.
  7. Vehicle speed.
  8. Throttle position angle.
  9. Manifold absolute pressure.
  10. Injector base pulse width.
  11. Loop status.

Monitors

  1. Comprehensive Component Monitor Monitors PCM systems for opens, shorts, grounds and out-of-range sensors. Also monitors rationality of sensors. Rationality is whether the sensors value is consistent with the operating conditions of the other sensors.
  2. Misfire Monitor Monitors engine misfire using crankshaft sensor to determine location and severity of misfire. A catalyst damaging misfire will flash the MIL, and a non-catalyst damaging misfire is a normal type "B" code.
  3. Fuel Trim Monitor Monitors short and long term fuel trim for being at maximum lean or rich limit.
  4. Oxygen Sensor Monitor Monitors all oxygen sensors for maximum voltage level, minimum voltage level and lean rich/rich lean switching rate.
  5. Oxygen Sensor Heater Monitor Monitors oxygen sensor heater by watching sensor's time-to-activity after a cold start.
  6. Catalyst Monitor Monitors catalyst efficiency by comparing activity rate of pre-catalyst oxygen sensor and post-catalyst oxygen sensor.
  7. EGR Monitor Monitors operation and flow rate of EGR system.
  8. EVAP Monitor Monitors EVAP system for large leaks, small leaks and purge flow.
  9. Secondary Air Monitor Monitors secondary air operation.

INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS

Note. Intermittent is a DTC or symptom, with a condition that cannot be duplicated.

Preliminary

Perform the Diagnostic System Check-Engine Controls before starting. See DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS .

Harness or Connector Intermittents

Many intermittent open or shorted circuits come and go with harness or connector movement caused by the following type conditions

  1. Vibration.
  2. Engine torque.
  3. Bumps or rough pavement.

Test for intermittents by performing the applicable procedure from the following list

  1. Move related connectors and wiring while monitoring the appropriate scan tool data.
  2. Move related connectors and wiring with the component commanded ON and OFF, with the scan tool. Observe the component operation.
  3. With the engine running, move related connectors and wiring while monitoring engine operation.

Verify whether the harness or connector movement affects any of the following systems

  1. Data displayed.
  2. Component or system operation.
  3. Engine operation.

Repair the components as necessary.

Electrical Connections Or Wiring

  1. Intermittents are usually caused by one or more of the following conditions: Poor electrical connections. Terminal tension. Wiring problems.
  2. Carefully inspect the suspected circuit for the following conditions: Poor mating of the connector halves. Terminals backed out or not fully seated in the connector body. Improperly formed or damaged terminals. Test for poor terminal tension. Poor terminal-to-wire connections including terminals crimped over insulation. This requires removing the terminal from the connector body. Corrosion or water intrusion. Pierced or damaged insulation can allow moisture to enter the wiring. The conductor can corrode inside the insulation, with little visible evidence. Look for swollen and stiff sections of wire in the suspect circuits. Wires that are broken inside the insulation. Pinched, cut, or rubbed through wiring in the harness. Wiring that is in contact with hot exhaust components.
  3. Repair the condition as necessary.

Control Module Power & Grounds, & Component Power & Grounds

Poor power or ground connections can cause widely varying symptoms.

  1. Test all control module power circuits. Many vehicles have multiple circuits supplying power to the control module. Other components in the system may have separate power circuits that may also need to be tested. Inspect connections at the module or component connectors, fuses, and any intermediate connections between the power source and the module or component. A test lamp or a Digital Multimeter (DMM) may indicate that voltage is present, but neither tests the ability of a circuit to carry sufficient current. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. See POWER DISTRIBUTION in appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.
  2. Test all control module ground and system ground circuits. The control module may have multiple ground circuits. Other components in the system may have separate grounds that may also need to be tested. Inspect grounds for clean and tight connections at the grounding point. Inspect the connections at the component and in splice packs, where applicable. Ensure that the circuit can carry the current necessary to operate the component. See GROUND DISTRIBUTION in appropriate SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

Temperature Sensitivity

  1. An intermittent condition may occur when a component or connection reaches normal operating temperature. The condition may occur only when the component or connection is cold, or only when the connection is hot.
  2. The following data may help to diagnose this type of intermittent condition: Freeze Frame/Failure Records. Scan tool snapshot. Vehicle data recorder.
  3. If the intermittent is related to heat, review the following data: High ambient temperatures. Underhood or engine generated heat. Circuit generated heat due to a poor connection, or high electrical load. Higher than normal load conditions, such as towing.
  4. If the intermittent is related to cold, review the following data: Low ambient temperatures. In extremely low temperatures, ice may form in a connection or component. Test for water intrusion. The condition only occurs on a cold start. The condition is not present after the vehicle warms up.
  5. Information from the customer may help to determine if the trouble follows a pattern that is temperature related.

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) & Electrical Noise

Some electrical components or circuits are sensitive to electromagnetic interference (EMI) or other types of electrical noise. Perform the following procedures

  1. Inspect for a misrouted harness that is too close to a high voltage or high current device. This condition may induce electrical noise on a circuit that could interfere with normal circuit operation. Inspect for wires that are too close to the following devices: Secondary ignition components. Motors. The generator.
  2. Determine whether the electrical system interference is caused by a malfunctioning relay, PCM driven solenoid or switch. These components may cause a sharp electrical surge. Normally, the problem will occur when the malfunctioning component is operating.
  3. Determine whether non-factory or aftermarket add-on accessories are installed in the vehicle. These accessories may lead to an emission related OBD-II failure. Determine if any of the following non-factory or aftermarket add-on accessories is causing the intermittent: Lights. 2-way radios. Amplifiers. Electric motors. Remote starters. Alarm systems. Cell phones.
  4. Test for an open diode across the A/C compressor clutch and for other open diodes. Some relays may contain a clamping diode.
  5. Test for proper performance of the generator. See ON-VEHICLE TESTING in appropriate GENERATORS & REGULATORS article in ELECTRICAL.
  6. If a DTC is determined to be intermittent, and the tests in this section do not reveal a problem, see «VEHICLE DATA RECORDER»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__vehicle-data-recorder) .

Incorrect PCM Programming

  1. There are only a few situations when reprogramming a PCM is appropriate, such as the following: A new service PCM is installed. A PCM from another vehicle is installed. Revised software or calibration files have been released for this vehicle.
  2. Verify that the PCM contains the correct software or calibration. If incorrect programming is found, reprogram the PCM with the most current software or calibration. See «POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__powertrain-control-module) under PROGRAMMING.

Duplicating Failure Conditions

  1. If none of the previous tests are successful, attempt to duplicate or capture the failure conditions.
  2. Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, where applicable, contains the conditions that were present when the DTC set. Perform the following procedure: Review and record Freeze Frame/Failure Records data. Clear the DTCs using the scan tool. Turn the key to OFF and wait 15 seconds. Operate the vehicle under the same conditions that were noted in Freeze Frame/Failure Records data, as closely as possible. The vehicle must also be operating within the Conditions for Running DTC. Monitor DTC Status for the DTC being tested. The scan tool will indicate Ran, when the enabling conditions have been satisfied long enough for the DTC to run. The scan tool will also indicate whether the DTC passed or failed.
  3. An alternate method is to drive the vehicle with the Digital Multimeter (DMM) connected to a suspected circuit. An abnormal reading on the DMM when the problem occurs, may help you locate the problem.

Scan Tool Snapshot

The scan tool can be set up to take a snapshot of the parameters available via serial data. The snapshot function records live data over a period of time. The recorded data can be played back and analyzed. The scan tool can also graph parameters singly or in combinations of parameters for comparison. The snapshot can be triggered manually at the time the symptom is noticed, or set up in advance to trigger when a DTC sets. An abnormal value captured in the recorded data may point to a system or component that needs to be investigated further. Refer to the scan tool user instructions for more information on the Snapshot function.

Vehicle Data Recorder

The J 42598 Vehicle Data Recorder is connected to the Data Link Connector (DLC) and sent with the customer. The J 42598 captures data for later retrieval and analysis by the technician. Refer to the vehicle data recorder user instructions for more information.

DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT - ENGINE CONTROLS

Diagnosis of computerized engine control system should be performed in the following order

  1. Ensure all engine systems not related to computer system are operating properly. DO NOT proceed with testing unless all other problems have been repaired. Diagnostic system check must be performed before using specific DTC testing procedure. See «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. If no DTCs are present and a driveability problem exists, see SYMPTOMS in appropriate TROUBLE SHOOTING - NO CODES article. Doing so will help identify proper system or component to check in appropriate SYSTEM & COMPONENT TESTING article.
  3. After necessary repairs are made, clear DTCs, verify vehicle will enter "closed loop" operation and ensure DTC does not reset.

Description

The Diagnostic System Check is an organized approach to identifying a condition that is created by a malfunction in the powertrain control system. The Diagnostic System Check must be the starting point for any driveability concern. The Diagnostic System Check directs the service technician to the next logical step in order to diagnose the concern. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic table reduces diagnostic time, and prevents the replacement of good parts.

Test Description

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 Lack of communication may be caused by a partial or a total malfunction of the Class 2 serial data circuit. The specified procedure determines the particular condition.
  2. 6 This step stores the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) information into the scan tool's memory. After you complete the diagnostic procedure, review the captured information in order to catch the next DTC if the control module stores multiple DTCs. Review the Freeze Frame data and the Failure Records data. Use this information in order to determine how frequently and how recently the DTC set. This information may help diagnose an intermittent condition. Information about the operating conditions at the time that the DTC set may also help diagnose an intermittent condition. Capturing the stored information saves the data that the PCM loses during the following conditions: When a diagnostic procedures instructs you to clear the DTCs. When a diagnostic procedure instructs you to disconnect the PCM connectors. When a diagnostic procedure instructs you to replace the PCM. See appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.
  3. 7 The presence of DTCs which begin with "U", indicate that some other module is not communicating. Following the specified procedure will gather all the available information before you perform the tests.
  4. 9 If there are other modules with DTCs set, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . The DTC list directs you to the appropriate diagnostic procedure. If the control module stores multiple powertrain DTCs, diagnose the DTCs in the following order: Component level DTCs, such as sensor DTCs, solenoid DTCs, and relay DTCs. Diagnose the multiple DTCs within this category in numerical order. Begin with the lowest numbered DTC, unless the diagnostic table directs you otherwise. System level DTCs, for example, misfire DTCs, fuel trim DTCs, and catalyst DTCs.
  5. 11 This step is for areas that have inspection and maintenance testing procedures for emissions testing. Use this step if the testing facility found one or more I/M system status that did not set.

Diagnostic Procedure

Note. Do not perform this diagnostic if there is not a driveability concern, unless another procedure directs you to this diagnostic. Before you proceed with diagnosis, search for applicable service bulletins. Unless a diagnostic procedure instructs you, do NOT clear the DTCs. If there is a condition with the starting system, see appropriate STARTERS article in ELECTRICAL. Ensure the battery has a full charge. Ensure the battery cables are clean and tight. Ensure the PCM grounds are clean, tight, and in the correct location.

  1. Install a scan tool. Does the scan tool turn ON? If yes, go to next step. If no, see SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
  2. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Attempt to establish communication with the listed control modules. If you are using a Tech 2, obtain the information using the Class 2 Message Monitor feature: PCM. Body Control Module (BCM). Instrument Panel (IP) cluster. Electronic Brake Control Module (EBCM). Driver Information Center (DIC). Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning (HVAC). Does the scan tool communicate with all the listed control modules? If yes, go to next step. If no, see SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CLASS 2 DEVICE in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
  3. Access CLASS 2 POWER MODE in DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK on scan tool. Rotate ignition switch through all positions while observing IGNITION SWITCH POWER MODE parameter. Actual ignition switch position should match IGNITION SWITCH POWER MODE parameter on scan tool. (Scheme 26) Do all ignition switch positions match all IGNITION SWITCH POWER MODE parameters on scan tool? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «POWER MODE MISMATCH»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline).
  4. Attempt to start the engine. Does the engine start and idle? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «NO-START DIAGNOSIS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-basic-diagnostic-procedures-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline-engines__no-start-diagnosis) in BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L "C", "G", "H", "K" & "N" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE article.
  5. Select the DTC display function for the following control modules: PCM, BCM, IP Cluster, EBCM, DIC and HVAC. Does the scan tool display any DTCs? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 10.
  6. Using a scan tool, select CAPTURED INFO in order to store the powertrain DTC information. When complete, go to next step.
  7. Does the scan tool display DTCs which begin with a "U"? If yes, see appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT for diagnosis. If no, go to next step.
  8. Does the scan tool display DTC P0601, P0602, P0604 or P0606? If yes, see «DTC P0601-P0607, P1600, P1621, P1627, P1680, P1681, P1683 & P2610: PCM MEMORY»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__dtc-p0601-p0607-p1600-p1621-p1627-p1680) under DIAGNOSTIC TESTS. If no, go to next step.
  9. Does the scan tool display DTC P0562, P0563, P1637 or P1638? If yes, see appropriate GENERATORS & REGULATORS article in ELECTRICAL. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions).
  10. Is the customer's concern with the automatic transmission? If yes, see appropriate DIAGNOSIS article in AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS. If no, go to next step.
  11. Is the customer's concern with Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing? If yes, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under DRIVE CYCLES.
  12. Review the following symptoms. Hard start, surges/chuggles, lack of power, sluggishness, sponginess, detonation/spark knock, hesitation, sag, stumble, cuts out, misses, poor fuel economy, poor fuel fill quality, rough, unstable, or incorrect idle and stalling, dieseling, run-on and backfire. See «SYMPTOMS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-trouble-shooting-no-codes-48l-53l-60l__symptoms) in TROUBLE SHOOTING - NO CODES - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L "C", "G", "H", "K" & "N" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE article. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, system is okay. If no, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions).

Note. On vehicles that have several control modules connected by serial data circuits, one module is the Power Mode Master (PMM). On vehicles covered in this article, the PMM is the Body Control Module (BCM). The BCM uses 3 signals from the ignition switch. These are the Ignition 0, Ignition 1, and Accessory.

Normal vehicle class 2 communications and module operations will not begin until the system power mode has been identified. Discrete wires from the ignition switch contacts are monitored by the BCM in order to determine the correct power mode. The BCM communicates the system power mode to all class 2 modules on the class 2 serial data line.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 6 This step tests for battery voltage on the signal circuits that are not required.
  2. 7 This step tests for no battery voltage on the required signal circuits.
  3. 8 If any ignition switch parameters that should be inactive in the present ignition switch position are active, 2 ignition switch signal circuits may be shorted together.
  4. 9 This step eliminates open circuits as the cause of the malfunction.

Note. This procedure is used if the observed vehicle power mode does not match the actual ignition switch position. Open the driver's door and leave it open during this test. This will disable the RAP power mode and eliminate this power mode from the power mode parameter list.

  1. Connect a scan tool to Data Link Connector (DLC). Turn OFF the ignition. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 6 .
  2. Turn the ignition switch to the UNLOCK position. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 6 .
  3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 6 .
  4. Turn the ignition switch to the CRANK position. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 6 .
  5. Turn the ignition switch to the ACCY position. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) . If no, go to next step.
  6. Turn OFF the ignition. Disconnect the BCM. Hold the ignition switch in the position that indicated the incorrect power mode. Using a test light connected to a good ground, test the BCM ignition switch inputs for voltage. See WIRING DIAGRAMS in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Is voltage present on only the inputs specified for the ignition switch position? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 8 .
  7. Hold the ignition switch in the position that indicated the incorrect power mode. Using a test light connected to a good ground, test the BCM ignition switch inputs for voltage. See WIRING DIAGRAMS in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. If voltage does not exist on any inputs specified for the ignition switch position, go to step 9 . If voltage exists on any inputs specified for the ignition switch position, go to step 11 .
  8. Disconnect the ignition switch. See appropriate STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Test the BCM ignition switch input circuits for a short to voltage. Test the BCM ignition switch circuits for a short between circuits. See WIRING DIAGRAMS in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 14 . If no, go to step 10 .
  9. Disconnect the ignition switch. See appropriate STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Test the BCM ignition switch input circuits for an open. See WIRING DIAGRAMS in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 14 . If no, go to next step.
  10. Inspect for poor connections and terminal tension at the harness connector of the ignition switch. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 14 . If no, go to step 12 .
  11. Inspect for poor connections and terminal tension at the harness connector of the BCM. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 14 . If no, go to step 13 .
  12. Replace the ignition switch. See appropriate STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. After ignition switch replacement, go to step 14 .
  13. Replace the BCM. See appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. After BCM replacement, go to next step.
  14. Reconnect all disconnected components and connectors. Using a scan tool, under the DIAGNOSTIC CIRCUIT CHECK menu, observe the CLASS 2 POWER MODE parameter. Cycle the ignition switch through all possible positions, one at a time. Does the displayed power mode parameter match the actual ignition switch position? If yes, system is okay. If no, go to step 1 .

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 Lack of communication may be due to a partial malfunction of the class 2 serial data circuit or due to a total malfunction of the class 2 serial data circuit. The specified procedure will determine the particular condition.
  2. 4 Determine if the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC) or Powertrain Control Modules (PCM) have DTCs set which may affect engine cooling operation.
  3. 5 The presence of DTCs which begin with "U" indicate some other module is not communicating. The specified procedure will compile all the available information before tests are performed.
  1. The Diagnostic System Check will provide the following information: The identification of the control module(s) which command the system. The ability of the control module(s) to communicate through the serial data circuit. The identification of any stored Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) and their status. The use of the Diagnostic System Check will identify the correct procedure for diagnosing the system and where the procedure is located.
  2. Install a scan tool. Does the scan tool turn ON? If yes, go to next step. If no, see SCAN TOOL DOES NOT POWER UP in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
  3. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Attempt to establish communication with the listed control modules. If you are using a Tech 2®, obtain the information using the Class 2 Message Monitor feature: Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC). PCM. Does the scan tool communicate with all the listed control modules? If yes, go to next step. If no, see SCAN TOOL DOES NOT COMMUNICATE WITH CLASS 2 DEVICE in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
  4. Select the powertrain control module display DTCs function on the scan tool. Does the scan tool display any DTCs? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «COOLING SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/basic-trouble-shooting/#basic-trouble-shooting-general-information__cooling-system-trouble-shooting) under ENGINE MECHANICAL in TROUBLE SHOOTING - BASIC PROCEDURES article in GENERAL INFORMATION.
  5. Does the scan tool display DTCs which begin with a "U"? If yes, see appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT for diagnosis. If no, go to next step.
  6. See «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) .

RETRIEVING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

DTCs are retrieved using a Tech 2 scan tool, or other OBD-II compatible scan tool connected to OBD-II 16-pin Data Link Connector (DLC). See DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS . DLC is located below left side of dash.

CLEARING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

There are 3 methods to clear DTCs.

Scan Tool

Scan tool is preferable way to clear DTC information. Freeze frame and failure record data will also be cleared.

Disconnect Battery

Note. On many OBD-II systems, PCM will retain memory for an extended period of time with battery disconnected. Memory may be retained for several days.

Disconnecting PCM power or battery ground will clear all PCM memory including DTCs, freeze frame, failure records, adaptive learning and system monitors.

Warm-up Cycles

If fault that caused DTC to set is repaired, PCM will begin to count warm-up cycles. After 40 consecutive warm-up cycles with no further faults, PCM will automatically clear DTC from memory.

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE LOCATION

Powertrain Control Module (PCM) is located in left front corner of engine compartment. See COMPONENT LOCATIONS .

CKP SYSTEM VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE

Note. The Crankshaft Position (CKP) system variation learn procedure is required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set: CKP sensor replacement. Engine replacement. PCM replacement. Harmonic balancer replacement. Crankshaft replacement. Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship. For additional diagnostic information, see DTC P0315: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR VARIATION NOT LEARNED .

  1. Install a scan tool to Data Link Connector (DLC).
  2. With a scan tool, monitor the powertrain control module for DTCs. If only DTC P0315 is set, go to next step. If a DTC other than P0315 is set, diagnose that DTC first. See «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) .
  3. With a scan tool, select the CRANKSHAFT POSITION VARIATION LEARN PROCEDURE.
  4. The scan tool instructs you to perform the following: Set parking brake. Block drive wheels. DO NOT apply brake pedal. Observe fuel cut-off for applicable engine. Accelerate to Wide Open Throttle (WOT). Release throttle when fuel cut-off occurs. Engine should not accelerate beyond calibrated RPM value. Release throttle immediately if value is exceeded. Cycle ignition from OFF to ON. Apply and hold brake pedal. Start and idle engine. Turn A/C OFF. Vehicle must remain in Park or Neutral. The scan tool monitors certain component signals to determine if all the conditions are met to continue with the procedure. The scan tool only displays the condition that inhibits the procedure. The scan tool monitors the following components: Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor activity. If there is a CKP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. See «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . Camshaft Position (CMP) sensor activity. If there is a CMP sensor condition, refer to the applicable DTC that set. See «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT). If the engine coolant temperature is not warm enough, idle the engine until the engine coolant temperature reaches the correct temperature.
  5. With the scan tool, enable the crankshaft position system variation learn procedure.
  6. Slowly increase the engine speed to the RPM that you observed.
  7. Immediately release the throttle when fuel cut-off is reached.
  8. The scan tool displays Learn Status: Learned this ignition. If the scan tool does NOT display this message and no additional DTCs set, see «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If a DTC set, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) .
  9. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds after the learn procedure is completed successfully.

ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET

  1. Turn the ignition key to the RUN position.
  2. To reset the Oil Life System, use the FUEL button to reach the ENGINE OIL LIFE screen. Press and hold the SELECT button for five seconds while ENGINE OIL LIFE is displayed. OIL LIFE RESET will appear on the display for 10 seconds to let you know the system is reset.

POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE

Note. Service of the PCM should normally consist of either replacement of the PCM or EEPROM programming. If the diagnostic procedures call for the PCM to be replaced, the PCM should be checked first to see if it is the correct part. If it is, remove the faulty PCM and install the new service PCM. The service PCM EEPROM will not be programmed. DTC P0601 and P0602 indicates the EEPROM is not programmed or has malfunctioned.

Note. Programing Powertrain Control Module requires a compatible scan tool and a Techline® terminal. Procedure uses a Tech 2 scan tool.

Remote Programming

Note. DO NOT program a control module unless you are directed by a service procedure or you are directed by a technical service bulletin. Programming a control module at any other time will not permanently correct a customer's concern.

  1. Turn OFF the ignition.
  2. Install the Tech 2® to the data link connector (DLC), with the Tech 2® turned OFF.
  3. Turn ON Tech 2®. Press ENTER at title screen.
  4. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
  5. Turn OFF all vehicle accessories.
  6. Select SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM at the MAIN MENU.
  7. Select REQUEST INFO.
  8. Enter the vehicle description by following the on-screen instructions.
  9. Verify that the correct VIN is entered on the Tech 2® and select YES.
  10. Turn OFF the Tech 2®.
  11. Disconnect the Tech 2® from the vehicle.
  12. Turn OFF the ignition.
  13. Connect the Tech 2® to the terminal.
  14. Launch the TIS application at the terminal.
  15. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM at the main screen.
  16. Highlight the following information on the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process Screen: Select DIAGNOSTIC TOOL, then select Tech 2. Select PROGRAMMING PROCESS. Identify whether an existing module is being reprogrammed or a module is being replaced with a new one. Select ECU LOCATION. Select vehicle.
  17. Select NEXT.
  18. Verify the connections and select NEXT.
  19. Verify the VIN and select NEXT.
  20. Select the appropriate controller for the vehicle being serviced.
  21. Select the type of programming to be performed from the following categories: NORMAL - Used for updating an existing calibration or programming a new controller. VEHICLE CONFIGURATION INDEX (VCI) - Used for updating an existing controller or programming a new controller for newer vehicles whose VINs are not yet in the database. RECONFIGURE - Used to reconfigure a vehicle for changes in tire size and/or axle ratios.
  22. Select NEXT.
  23. Select the appropriate calibration file for the vehicle being serviced.
  24. Select NEXT.
  25. Verify your selection on the Summary screen.
  26. Select NEXT.
  27. Perform the CRANKSHAFT POSITION VARIATION RELEARN PROCEDURE using the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS feature, if applicable.
  28. Close the application and return to the TIS APPLICATION SELECTION screen after the download is complete.
  29. Turn OFF the Tech 2®.
  30. Disconnect the Tech 2® from the terminal.
  31. Connect the Tech 2® to the vehicle DLC, with the engine and the Tech 2® OFF.
  32. Turn ON the Tech 2®.
  33. Press ENTER at the TITLE screen.
  34. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
  35. Select SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM.
  36. Select the PROGRAM ECU function on the Tech 2.
  37. Verify the VIN and calibration numbers, select CONTINUE.
  38. Follow the on-screen instructions and select CONTINUE.
  39. Select CONTINUE and exit the program after the Tech 2 displays PROGRAMMING WAS SUCCESSFUL.
  40. Turn OFF the ignition.
  41. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  42. Disconnect the Tech 2 from the vehicle.
  43. Verify the control module programming was successful. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds.
  44. Start the engine. Repeat the Service Programming System procedure if the vehicle does not start or starts but runs rough.

Off-Board Remote Programming

Note. The Off-Board Programming Adapter Kit (J 41207-C) is required when a module must be programmed without having the vehicle present. The adapter allows the module to be turned ON and communicate with the scan tool.

  1. Obtain the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) of the vehicle for which the module is being programmed.
  2. Launch the TIS application at the terminal.
  3. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM.
  4. Highlight the following information on the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process Screen: Select DIAGNOSTIC TOOL, then select Tech 2. Select PROGRAMMING PROCESS. Identify whether an existing module is being reprogrammed or a module is being replaced with a new one. Select ECU LOCATION. Select OFF-BOARD PROGRAMMING ADAPTER.
  5. Select NEXT.
  6. Follow the directions on the Preparing for Communication screen for connecting the following components: The control module. The Off-Board Programming Adapter (OBPA). Refer to the TIS users guide for a listing of the OBPA. The Tech 2.
  7. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING REQUEST INFORMATION function on the Tech 2.
  8. Follow the Tech 2 instructions to obtain the module data and security information.
  9. After the Tech 2 has received the data from the module, exit the Request Info mode.
  10. Disconnect the Tech 2 from the OBPA.
  11. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  12. Connect the Tech 2 to the terminal.
  13. Turn ON the Tech 2.
  14. Select NEXT at the terminal after the Tech 2 start-up screen appears.
  15. Enter the VIN of the vehicle that will be receiving the control module.
  16. Select NEXT.
  17. Select the type of programming to be performed from the following categories: NORMAL - Used for updating an existing calibration or programming a new controller. VEHICLE CONFIGURATION INDEX (VCI) - Used for updating an existing controller or programming a new controller for newer vehicles whose VINs are not yet in the database. RECONFIGURE - Used to reconfigure a vehicle for changes in tire size and/or axle ratios.
  18. Select NEXT.
  19. Select a calibration on the Calibration Selection screen, if necessary.
  20. Ensure all the desired folder tabs have a green check mark.
  21. Select NEXT.
  22. Verify the current and the selected calibration of the control module on the Summary screen.
  23. Select NEXT.
  24. Select OK.
  25. On model year 1996 and newer controllers, a Crankshaft Position (CKP) relearn procedure box may appear. Select OK.
  26. Follow the on-screen instructions, if any, when the Program Controller/Programming Complete screen appears.
  27. Select CLOSE.
  28. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  29. Disconnect the Tech 2 from the terminal.
  30. Connect the Tech 2 to the OBPA.
  31. Turn ON the Tech 2.
  32. Select Enter at the title screen.
  33. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM at the Main Menu.
  34. Select the PROGRAM ECU function.
  35. Select CONTINUE.
  36. Follow the on-screen instructions.
  37. Select Continue.
  38. Select EXIT when the programming is complete.
  39. Turn OFF the OBPA.
  40. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  41. Disconnect the OBPA from the Tech 2 and the control module.

Off-Board Pass-Thru Programming

Note. The Off-Board Programming Adapter Kit (J 41207-C) is required when a module must be programmed without having the vehicle present. The adapter allows the module to be turned ON and communicate with the scan tool.

  1. Launch the TIS application at the terminal.
  2. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM.
  3. Highlight the following information on the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process Screen: Select DIAGNOSTIC TOOL, then select PASS-THRU. Select PROGRAMMING PROCESS. Identify whether an existing module is being reprogrammed or a module is being replaced with a new one. Select ECU LOCATION. Select OFF-BOARD PROGRAMMING ADAPTER.
  4. Select NEXT.
  5. Complete all terminal-directed data at the Preparing for Communication/Determine Vehicle screen until NEXT is highlighted.
  6. Select NEXT.
  7. Follow the on-screen instructions for connecting the following components: The control module. The Off-Board Programming Adapter (OBPA). Refer to the TIS users guide for a listing of the OBPA. The Tech 2.
  8. Select NEXT.
  9. Pass-Thru displays the VIN stored in the control module. If a new control module is being programmed, enter the correct VIN of the vehicle.
  10. Select NEXT.
  11. Select the appropriate options if the Options screen appears.
  12. Select NEXT.
  13. Select the type of programming to be performed from the following categories: NORMAL - Used for updating an existing calibration or programming a new controller. VEHICLE CONFIGURATION INDEX (VCI) - Used for updating an existing controller or programming a new controller for newer vehicles whose VINs are not yet in the database. RECONFIGURE - Used to reconfigure a vehicle for changes in tire size and/or axle ratios.
  14. Select NEXT.
  15. Select a calibration on the Calibration Selection screen, if necessary.
  16. Ensure all the desired folder tabs have a green check mark.
  17. Select NEXT.
  18. Verify the current and the selected calibration of the control module on the Summary screen.
  19. Select NEXT.
  20. Select OK.
  21. On model year 1996 and newer controllers, a Crankshaft Position (CKP) relearn procedure box may appear. Select OK.
  22. Follow the on-screen instructions, if any, when the Program Controller/Programming Complete screen appears.
  23. Select CLOSE.
  24. Turn OFF the OBPA.
  25. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  26. Disconnect the OBPA from the Tech 2 and the control module.

Pass-Thru Programming

Note. Pass-Thru programming allows the scan tool to remain connected to the terminal and to the vehicle throughout the programming process. The vehicle must be in close proximity to the terminal while using Pass-Thru.

  1. Launch the TIS application at the terminal.
  2. Select the SERVICE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM.
  3. Highlight the following information on the Select Diagnostic Tool and Programming Process Screen: Select DIAGNOSTIC TOOL, then select PASS-THRU. Select PROGRAMMING PROCESS. Identify whether an existing module is being reprogrammed or a module is being replaced with a new one. Select ECU LOCATION. Select VEHICLE.
  4. Select NEXT.
  5. Complete all terminal-directed data on the Preparing for Communication/Determine Vehicle screen until NEXT is highlighted.
  6. Select NEXT.
  7. Follow the instructions on the Preparing for Communication screen.
  8. Select NEXT.
  9. Verify the VIN on the VALIDATE VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER screen.
  10. Select NEXT.
  11. If an option screen appears, verify the vehicle configuration and/or RPO information.
  12. Select NEXT.
  13. Highlight the appropriate control module and programming type on the SUPPORTED CONTROLLERS screen.
  14. Select NEXT.
  15. Select the proper calibrations on the CALIBRATION SELECTION screen.
  16. Ensure all the folder tabs have a green check mark.
  17. Select NEXT.
  18. Verify the current calibrations with the selected calibrations.
  19. Select NEXT.
  20. The TRANSFER DATA screen will appear until the progress bar reaches 100 percent. This may take up to 30 minutes.
  21. Complete all of the terminal-directed data on the PROGRAMMING COMPLETE screen.
  22. Turn OFF the Tech 2.
  23. Disconnect the Tech 2® from the vehicle.

THEFT DETERRENT PASSWORD LEARN PROCEDURE

Note. The Body Control Module (BCM) must be programmed with the proper RPO configurations before performing learn procedures. See PROGRAMMING in appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article. If replacing the BCM with a GM Service Parts Operations (SPO) replacement part, the module will learn Passlock® sensor data code immediately. The existing PCM however, must learn the new fuel continue password when the BCM is replaced. If replacing a PCM with a GM Service Parts Operations (SPO) replacement part, after programming, these modules will learn the incoming fuel continue password immediately upon receipt of a password message. Once a password message is received, and a password is learned, a learn procedure must be performed to change this password again. A PCM which has been previously installed in another vehicle will have learned the other vehicle's fuel continue password and will require a learn procedure after programming to learn the current vehicle's password.

Use this procedure after replacing

  1. Passlock® Sensor
  2. BCM
  3. PCM

10-Minute Learn Procedure

Note. This procedure requires a Tech 2® scan tool and a Techline® terminal with current SPS (Service Programming System) software.

  1. Connect the Tech 2® to the vehicle.
  2. Select "REQUEST INFORMATION" under "SERVICE PROGRAMMING".
  3. Disconnect the Tech 2® from the vehicle and connect it to a Techline® terminal.
  4. On the techline terminal, select "THEFT MODULE RE-LEARN" under "SERVICE PROGRAMMING".
  5. Disconnect the Tech 2® from the Techline® terminal and connect it to the vehicle.
  6. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
  7. Select "PROGRAM ECU" under "SERVICE PROGRAMMING".
  8. Attempt to start the engine, then release the key to ON (vehicle will not start).
  9. Observe the SECURITY telltale, after approximately 10 minutes the telltale will turn OFF (the vehicle is now ready to relearn the Passlock® Sensor Data Code and/or password on the next ignition switch transition from OFF to CRANK).
  10. Turn OFF the ignition, and wait 5 seconds.
  11. Start the engine (the vehicle has now learned the password).
  12. With the Tech 2® (scan tool), clear any DTCs.

30-Minute Learn Procedure

  1. Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF.
  2. Attempt to start the engine, then release the key to ON (vehicle will not start).
  3. Observe the SECURITY telltale, after approximately 10 minutes the telltale will turn OFF.
  4. Turn OFF the ignition, and wait 5 seconds.
  5. Repeat steps 1 - 4 two more times for a total of 3 cycles/30 minutes (the vehicle is now ready to relearn the Passlock® Sensor Data Code and/or passwords on the next ignition switch transition from OFF to CRANK).
  6. Start the engine (the vehicle has now learned the Passlock® Sensor Data Code and/or password).
  7. With a scan tool, clear any DTCs if needed (history DTCs will self clear after 100 ignition cycles).

DRIVE CYCLES

Several states require that a vehicle pass On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) system tests and the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) emission inspection in order to renew license plates. This is accomplished by viewing the I/M System Status display on a scan tool. Using a scan tool, the technician can observe the I/M System Status in order to verify that the vehicle meets the criteria that complies with the local area requirements.

Conditions for Updating I/M System Status

Each system requires at least one, and sometimes several, diagnostic tests. The results of these tests are reported by a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). A system monitor is complete when either all of the DTCs comprising the monitor have Run and Passed, or any one of the DTCs comprising the monitor have illuminated the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). Once all of the tests are complete, the I/M System Status display will indicate YES in the Completed column. For example, when the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heater Test indicates YES, all of the oxygen sensor heaters have been diagnosed. If the vehicle has four heated oxygen sensors, all four heater circuits have been diagnosed. The I/M System Status will indicate NO under the Completed column when any of the required tests for that system have not run. The following is a list of conditions that would set the I/M System Status indicator to NO

  1. The vehicle is new from the factory and has not yet been driven through the necessary drive conditions to complete the tests.
  2. The battery has been disconnected or discharged below operating voltage.
  3. The control module power or ground has been interrupted.
  4. The control module has been reprogrammed.
  5. The control module DTCs have been cleared as part of a service procedure.

Monitored Emission Control Systems

The OBD-II System monitors all emission control systems that are on-board. Not all vehicles have a full complement of emission control systems. For example, a vehicle may not be equipped with secondary Air Injection (AIR) or Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR). The OBD-II regulations require monitoring of the following

  1. Air conditioning system.
  2. Catalytic converter efficiency.
  3. Comprehensive component monitoring. Emission related inputs and outputs.
  4. Evaporative (EVAP) emissions system.
  5. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) system.
  6. Fuel delivery system.
  7. Heated catalyst monitoring.
  8. Misfire monitoring.
  9. Oxygen sensor system (O2S or HO2S).
  10. Oxygen sensor heater system (HO2S heater).
  11. Secondary Air Injection (AIR) system.

For the specific DTCs required for each system, see

table. Systems such as fuel delivery, misfire, and comprehensive components may not be listed in a system status list. These tests run continuously on some vehicles and may not require an indicator.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 1 Any DTCs set, even those that are not listed in the INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS table, may prevent the required DTCs from running. If there is any question as to whether a set DTC is disabling the required I/M diagnostic, review the Conditions for Running in the diagnostic procedures for the DTC required by the I/M diagnostic. A list of disabling DTCs, if applicable, is contained in the supporting text for that DTC.
  2. 2 Anytime a control module is reprogrammed or the diagnostic trouble codes are cleared as part of a repair procedure, all the I/M System Status indicators will reset to NO.
  3. 3 Use discretion when determining whether the entire system set procedure needs to be performed. For example, if the only tests that have not run are those that require the engine to be at operating temperature, then only those individual tests need to be run. There is no need to allow the engine to completely cool in order to run these tests.

Procedure

  1. Did you perform the Diagnostic System Check-Engine Controls? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. Repair any DTCs or driveability concerns that would prevent the I/M System Status tests from completing. Did you find and repair a DTC or driveability concern? If yes, go to step 3 . If no, go to next step.
  2. Review any service bulletins for software updates that may prevent I/M readiness. Perform any reprogramming or repairs indicated by the service bulletins. Was a reprogramming or repair service required? If yes, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE COMPLETE SYSTEM SET PROCEDURE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) . If no, go to next step.
  3. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Is more than one test indicating a NO status? If yes, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE COMPLETE SYSTEM SET PROCEDURE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) . If no, go to the I/M System Set Procedure for the indicated system.

Diagnostic Aids

The I/M System Status display provides an indication of when the control module has completed the required tests. This does not necessarily mean that the test has passed, only that a decision was made. If the diagnostic fails, a DTC will indicate the failure. If a failure indication is present for a DTC associated with one of the I/M regulated systems, the failure indication may prevent other required tests from running. For example, a DTC for the control circuit of the relay controlling an AIR pump may not be listed in the INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS table because this is a continuous test. If this DTC is set, the Active Tests for the AIR system may not run. The I/M System Status information may be useful for a technician to determine if diagnostics have run when verifying repairs.

The purpose of the I/M Complete System Set Procedure is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary to execute all of the I/M readiness diagnostics, and complete the trips for those particular diagnostics. When all diagnostic tests are complete, the I/M System Status indicators are set to YES. Perform this test when more than one or all of the I/M System Status indicators are set to NO.

Conditions for Running

Cold Start

  1. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is more than 74 kPa.
  2. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is below 86°F (30°C).
  3. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is below 86°F (30°C).
  4. The difference between the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) and the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is 14°F (8°C) or less.
  5. The battery voltage is between 9-18 volts.
  6. The fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 1 Make sure that you perform the Inspection/Maintenance System Check before performing this test. Failure to do so may result in difficulty updating the status to YES.
  2. 2 This step runs the HO2S Heater Tests and initiates the EVAP System Test. Preprogramming the scan tool will reduce the amount of time the oxygen sensor heaters operate while verifying the enable criteria. The engine control module considers the engine to be cold if the following conditions are met: Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) less than 86°F (30°C). ECT and Intake Air Temperature (IAT) are within 14°F (8°C) of each other at start-up.
  3. 3 This step runs the EVAP, AIR and the Oxygen Sensor Tests. The EVAP Test begins once the engine coolant reaches a calibrated temperature. The AIR Test, if equipped, begins shortly after Closed Loop and the indicated speed is achieved. The Oxygen Sensor Tests begin once the engine is at operating temperature, in Closed Loop fuel control, and a calibrated amount of time has elapsed.
  4. 4 This step runs the Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Tests. The EGR Tests are run during a gradual deceleration with a closed throttle. The vehicle speed is required in order to maintain a high, steady MAP signal.
  5. 5 This step runs the Catalyst Tests. This test runs during the idle period immediately following a cruise period that meets a minimum calibrated RPM and time period.
  6. 6 Perform the individual system test for any of the systems that do not update to YES.
  7. 7 The I/M System Status only reports on whether or not a diagnostic has run, not the outcome of the test. If any emission related DTC sets after the tests are complete, the DTC will require diagnosis.
  1. Did you perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Check? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. Preprogram the scan tool with the vehicle information before the ignition is turned ON. Ensure that the vehicle is within the Conditions for Running specified in the supporting text. Turn OFF all of the accessories (e.g., A/C, blower fan, etc.). Set the vehicle parking brake. Verify that the transmission is in Park for automatic transmissions and Neutral for manual transmissions. Start the engine and allow the engine to idle. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes. When complete, go to next step.
  3. In order for the next group of tests to run, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Acceleration at part throttle to 55 MPH with this speed maintained until the engine reaches operating temperature. This may be up to 8-10 minutes depending on the start up coolant temperature. Continued operation under these conditions for an additional 6 minutes. After procedure, go to next step.
  4. In order for the next group of tests to run, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Vehicle speed reduced to 45 MPH with this speed maintained for one additional minute. Four decelerations of 25 seconds each from 45 MPH while the following criteria is maintained: The throttle is closed. NO brake application on either manual or automatic transmission. NO clutch actuation on a manual transmission. NO manual downshift. The vehicle speed remains above 25 MPH. After each deceleration period, the vehicle is returned to 45 MPH under part throttle acceleration and the speed is maintained for 15 seconds. When complete, go to next step.
  5. In order for the next group of tests to run, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Acceleration at part throttle to 45-55 MPH with this speed maintained for 2 minutes. Deceleration to 0 MPH. Engine idling for 2 minutes while the following criteria is maintained: Service brake depressed. Automatic transmission in drive. Manual transmission in neutral with the clutch pedal depressed. When complete, go to next step.
  6. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did all of the I/M System Status indicators update to YES? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to the I/M System Set Procedure for the indicated systems.
  7. With a scan tool, observe the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display. Does the scan tool indicate any Emission Related DTCs set? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.

Rough road conditions may prevent some of the tests from running. Extreme high or low ambient temperatures may prevent tests such as Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heater and Evaporative (EVAP) emission System from initiating. If a step is interrupted before completion, perform the remaining portion of the set procedures. Any portion of the set procedure that requires the engine at operating temperature may be repeated. This allows most of the diagnostics to run and the remaining tests can be performed using the individual System Set Procedures. If the vehicle has recently run, start this procedure at step 3 . This will allow the tests that require the engine at operating temperature to run. Using this method allows shorter cool down periods if the tests requiring a cold start do not initiate. The scan tool can be used to monitor each of the I/M System Status indicators during the I/M Complete System Set Procedure. When all of the indicators for a test step have updated to YES, testing can move on to the next step even if the remaining portion of the test is not complete. For example, step 3 is designed to run the EVAP, secondary Air Injection (AIR), and HO2S tests. The procedure instructs the technician to operate the vehicle in the enable conditions for 6 minutes. If all 3 tests have updated to YES within 4 minutes, it is not necessary to continue with the enable conditions and testing can advance to the next step.

SystemDTCs Required To Set System Status To YES
CatalystDTCs P0420 & P0430
Evaporative Emission (EVAP)DTCs P0442, P0446 & P0496
Oxygen SensorDTC P0133 Or P0153, DTC P0140 Or P0160, DTC P1133 Or P1153
Oxygen Sensor HeaterDTCs P0135, P0141, P0155 Or P0161

INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS

The purpose of this test is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary to execute Inspection/Maintenance readiness diagnostics for the catalyst system. The test may be used to set the I/M System Status indicators to YES. Ensure that the vehicle meets the requirements listed in Conditions for Running before performing this test. Failure to meet the necessary requirements may produce inaccurate test results.

  1. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is more than 74 kPa.
  2. The engine coolant is at operating temperature, 160-248°F (71-120°C).
  3. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 5-167°F (-15-75°C).
  4. The engine is in Closed Loop fuel control.
  5. The engine has run for 6-8 minutes off idle in order to initiate test.
  6. The battery voltage is between 11-18 volts.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 1 Make sure that you perform the Inspection/Maintenance System Check before performing this test. Failure to do so may result in difficulty updating the status to YES.
  2. 2 Perform the Catalyst Test during the idle period immediately following the cruise period.
  3. 3 This step identifies a first failure of a type "B" DTC. A DTC only appears on the I/M System Status display when the DTC becomes a MIL illuminating DTC. This occurs on the second failure of a type "B" DTC. A first failure of a type "B" DTC will not allow the I/M System Status to update to YES. See «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  4. 4 This step helps identify any unique or unusual criteria required to run the diagnostic test if the universal set procedure does not. This information is located in Conditions for Running DTC.
  5. 5 The I/M System Status only reports on whether or not a diagnostic has run, not the outcome of the test. If any Emission Related DTC sets after the tests are complete, the DTC will require diagnosis.
  1. Did you perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Check? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. Ensure the vehicle is within the Conditions for Running specified in the supporting text. Turn OFF all of the accessories (e.g., A/C, blower fan, etc.). Start the engine and allow the engine to idle. For this test to run, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Acceleration at part throttle to 55 MPH with this speed maintained for 8 minutes. Deceleration to 0 MPH. Engine idling for 2 minutes while the following criteria is maintained: Service brake depressed. Automatic transmission in Drive. Manual transmission in Neutral with the clutch pedal depressed. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did the Catalyst System Status update to YES? If yes, go to step 5 . If no, go to next step.
  3. With a scan tool, observe the DTC Information. Does the scan tool indicate any failed DTCs? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, go to next step.
  4. To determine which DTCs are required to run in order to complete this test, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) table. With a scan tool, observe the NOT RAN SINCE CODE CLEARED display. Determine which of the DTCs required for a YES status has not run. Enter the DTC number in the Specific DTC menu of the scan tool. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running DTC. Repeat the procedure until the scan tool indicates the diagnostic test has run. Repeat procedure for any additional required DTCs that have not run. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did the Catalyst System Status update to YES? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  5. With a scan tool, observe the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display. Does the scan tool indicate any Emission Related DTCs set? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.

The control module runs a maximum of 6 tests per trip until the Catalyst System Status updates to YES. If the status does not update, the test outlined in this procedure can be repeated until the I/M System Status updates to YES. The I/M System Status does not indicate whether the test has passed or failed, only that a decision was made. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed, the I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the required tests have not run. When a failure occurs, the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display will indicate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is requested. The I/M System Status also registers the number of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). The first failure of a type "B" DTC does not constitute a final determination of pass or fail, and will not update the I/M System Status to YES. A second trip is required, and all the conditions to run must be met in order for the test to run again. These conditions may include a partial to complete engine cool down. The I/M System Status will update only when an emission related DTC fails the second time, or when all of the tests pass. If there is an impending failure, the system may require more time to run the diagnostic than was allotted in the set procedure. If the test does not run after numerous attempts and no DTC is set, review the appropriate scan tool data list and the service information for an indication of why the test does not complete. Some tests may abort due to changes in the conditions while the test is running. For example, changes in engine load, such as a cooling fan or an A/C compressor clutch turning ON, may cause the test to abort. If a diagnostic test is difficult to run, observe the I/M System Status display while maintaining the necessary enable conditions until the system status updates to YES.

The purpose of this test is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary in order to execute the I/M readiness diagnostics for the Evaporative (EVAP) emission system. The test may be used in order to set the I/M System Status indicators to YES. The I/M System Status Display on the scan tool provides an indication of when the control module has completed the required tests. The I/M System Status does not indicate that the tests have passed or failed. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed and I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the other tests for that system have not run. Performing a visual inspection prior to running the EVAP test may prevent having to repeat the test. A failed or aborted test will require the vehicle to cool down in order to meet the enable criteria to run another test.

  1. DTCs P0442, P0446, P0455, P0496 are not set.
  2. The barometric pressure is more than 75 kPa.
  3. The fuel level is between 1/4 and 3/4.
  4. The battery voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  5. The test will initiate only after a cold start. The control module considers the engine to be cold if the following conditions are met: The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 39-86°F (3.8-30.0°C). The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 39-86°F (3.8-30.0°C). The difference between the ECT and the IAT is less than 14°F (8°C).
  1. Did you perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Check? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. Ensure that the vehicle is within the Conditions for Running specified in the supporting text. Turn OFF all of the accessories (e.g., A/C, blower fan, etc.). Start the engine and idle. To run this test, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Acceleration at part throttle to 45 MPH with this speed maintained until the engine reaches operating temperature. This may be up to 8-10 minutes depending on the start up coolant temperature. Continue the operating conditions for an additional 3 minutes after the engine reaches operating temperature. Deceleration to 0 MPH. Engine idling for 2 minutes. Turn OFF the ignition for one hour. After one hour, turn ON the ignition. Using scan tool, observe EVAP system status. Did the EVAP System Status update to YES? If yes, go to step 5 . If no, go to next step.
  3. With a scan tool, observe the DTC Information. Does the scan tool indicate any failed DTCs? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, go to next step.
  4. To determine which DTCs are required to run in order to complete this test, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) table. With a scan tool, observe the NOT RAN SINCE CODE CLEARED display. Determine which of the DTCs required for a YES status has not run. Enter the DTC number in the Specific DTC menu of the scan tool. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running DTC. Repeat the procedure until the scan tool indicates the diagnostic test has run. Repeat this procedure for any additional required DTCs that have not run. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did the EVAP System Status update to YES? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  5. With a scan tool, observe the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display. Does the scan tool indicate any Emission Related DTCs set? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.

If there is an impending failure, the system may require more time to run the diagnostic than was allotted in the set procedure. If the test does not run after numerous attempts and no DTC is set, review the appropriate scan tool data list and the service information for an indication of why the test does not complete. Some tests may abort due to changes in the conditions while the test is running. For example, changes in engine load such as cooling fan or an A/C compressor clutch turning ON may cause the test to abort.

The purpose of this test is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary to execute I/M readiness diagnostics for the oxygen sensor (O2S, HO2S) system. The test may be used to set the I/M System Status to YES. The I/M System Status display on the scan tool provides an indication of whether the control module has completed the required tests. The I/M System Status does not indicate that the tests have passed or failed. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed, the I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the other tests for that system have not run. Ensure the vehicle meets the requirements listed in Conditions for Running before performing this test. Failure to meet the necessary requirements may produce inaccurate test results.

  1. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is more than 135°F (57°C).
  2. The engine is running in Closed Loop fuel control.
  3. The engine has been running for more than 160 seconds.
  4. The battery voltage is between 9-18 volts.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the procedure.

  1. 1 Make sure that you perform the Inspection/Maintenance System Check before performing this test. Failure to do so may result in difficulty updating the status to YES.
  2. 2 The oxygen sensor tests begin shortly after the indicated speed is achieved. The engine RPM may be too low in overdrive on manual transmission vehicles. If difficulty is encountered updating the status, operate the vehicle in the recommended gear during the test.
  3. 3 This step identifies a first failure of a type "B" DTC. A DTC only appears on the I/M System Status display when the DTC becomes a MIL illuminating DTC. This occurs on the second failure of a type "B" DTC. A first failure of a type "B" DTC will not allow the I/M System Status to update to YES. See «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  4. 4 This step helps identify any unique or unusual criteria required to run the diagnostic test if the universal set procedure does not. This information is located in Conditions for Running DTC.
  5. 5 The I/M System Status only reports on whether or not a diagnostic has run, not the outcome of the test. If any Emission Related DTC sets after the tests are complete, the DTC will require diagnosis.
  1. Did you perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Check? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. Ensure that the vehicle is within the Conditions for Running specified in the supporting text. Turn OFF all of the accessories (e.g., A/C, blower fan, etc.). Start the engine and allow it to idle. To run this test, the vehicle must operate in the following conditions: Acceleration at part throttle to 45-55 MPH with this speed maintained for 6 minutes or until the I/M System Status updates to YES. Manual transmissions, either 5 or 6 speed, may require operation in 4th or 5th gear respectively, in order for this test to run. With a scan tool, review the I/M System Status display. Did the HO2S/O2S System Status update to YES? If yes, go to step 5 . If no, go to next step.
  3. With a scan tool, observe the DTC Information. Does the scan tool indicate any failed DTCs? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, go to next step.
  4. To determine which DTCs are required to run in order to complete this test, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) table. With a scan tool, observe the NOT RAN SINCE CODE CLEARED display. Determine which of the DTCs required for a YES status has not run. Enter the DTC number in the Specific DTC menu of the scan tool. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running DTC. Repeat the procedure until the scan tool indicates the diagnostic test has run. Repeat this procedure for any additional required DTCs that have not run. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did the HO2S/O2S System Status update to YES? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  5. With a scan tool, observe the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display. Does the scan tool indicate any Emission Related DTCs set? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.

If the status does not update, the test outlined in this procedure can be repeated until the I/M System Status updates to YES. The I/M System Status does not indicate whether the test has passed or failed, only that a decision was made. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed, the I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the required tests have not run. When a failure occurs, the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display will indicate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is requested. The I/M System Status also registers the number of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). The first failure of a type "B" DTC does not constitute a final determination of pass or fail, and will not update the I/M System Status to YES. A second trip is required, and all the conditions to run must be met in order for the test to run again. These conditions may include a partial to complete engine cool down. The I/M System Status will update only when an emission related DTC fails the second time, or when all of the tests pass. If there is an impending failure, the system may require more time to run the diagnostic than was allotted in the set procedure. If the test does not run after numerous attempts and no DTC is set, review the appropriate scan tool data list and the service information for an indication of why the test does not complete. Some tests may abort due to changes in the conditions while the test is running. For example, changes in engine load, such as a cooling fan or an A/C compressor clutch turning ON, may cause the test to abort. If a diagnostic test is difficult to run, observe the I/M System Status display while maintaining the necessary enable conditions until the system status updates to YES.

The purpose of this test is to satisfy the enable criteria necessary to execute I/M readiness diagnostics for the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) system. The test may be used to set the I/M System Status to YES. The I/M System Status display on the scan tool provides an indication of whether the control module has completed the required tests. The I/M System Status does not indicate that the tests have passed or failed. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed, the I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the other tests for that system have not run. Ensure that the vehicle meets the requirements listed in Conditions for Running before performing this test. Failure to meet the necessary requirements may produce inaccurate test results.

  1. The start-up Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is less than 122°F (50°C).
  2. The start-up Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is less than 122°F (50°C).
  3. The difference between the IAT and the ECT is less than 14°F (8°C).
  4. The battery voltage is between 11-18 volts.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers on the procedure.

  1. 1 Make sure that you perform the Inspection/Maintenance System Check before performing this test. Failure to do so may result in difficulty updating the status to YES.
  2. 2 Preprogramming the scan tool will reduce the amount of time the oxygen sensor heaters operate while verifying the enable criteria.
  3. 3 This step identifies a first failure of a type "B" DTC. A DTC only appears on the I/M System Status display when the DTC becomes a MIL illuminating DTC. This occurs on the second failure of a type "B" DTC. A first failure of a type "B" DTC will not allow the I/M System Status to update to YES. See «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  4. 4 This step helps identify any unique or unusual criteria required to run the diagnostic test if the universal set procedure does not. This information is located in Conditions for Running DTC.
  5. 5 The I/M System Status only reports on whether or not a diagnostic has run, not the outcome of the test. If any emission related DTC sets after the tests are complete, the DTC will require diagnosis.
  1. Did you perform the Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) System Check? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM CHECK»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  2. After verifying the enable criteria, turn OFF the ignition for approximately 5 minutes to allow the sensors to cool before continuing with the test. Preprogram the scan tool with the vehicle information before the ignition is turned ON. Ensure that the vehicle is within the Conditions for Running specified in the supporting text. Set the vehicle parking brake. Verify that the transmission is in Park for automatic transmissions and Neutral for manual transmissions. Turn OFF all of the accessories (e.g., A/C, blower fan, etc.). Start the engine and allow the engine to idle. Allow the engine to idle for 2 minutes or until the I/M System Status indicator updates to YES. Did the HO2S Heater System Status update to YES? If yes, go to step 5 . If no, go to next step.
  3. With a scan tool, observe the DTC Information. Does the scan tool indicate any failed DTCs? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, go to next step.
  4. To determine which DTCs are required to run in order to complete this test, see «INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE SYSTEM DTCS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) table. With a scan tool, observe the NOT RAN SINCE CODE CLEARED display. Determine which of the DTCs required for a YES status has not run. Enter the DTC number in the Specific DTC menu of the scan tool. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running DTC. Repeat the procedure until the scan tool indicates the diagnostic test has run. Repeat this procedure for any additional required DTCs that have not run. With a scan tool, observe the I/M System Status display. Did the HO2S Heater System Status update to YES? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC AIDS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) .
  5. With a scan tool, observe the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display. Does the scan tool indicate any Emission Related DTCs set? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.

The HO2S Heater Tests will normally run within the 2 minutes allotted in the procedure. If there is an indeterminate condition, the test may take up to 8 minutes on some vehicles before a decision of pass or fail is made. If the test does not update within the allotted period of time, continue operation within the enable conditions until the test updates to YES. If the test does not update to YES, it may have failed or aborted due to the loss of enabling conditions. Extremely high ambient temperatures may prevent the HO2S Heater Test from initiating. The I/M System Status does not indicate whether the test has passed or failed, only that a decision was made. When all of the diagnostics for a specific system have run and passed, the I/M System Status will update to YES. If a test for a specific system has failed, the I/M System Status will update to YES, indicating a determination was made, even if all of the required tests have not run. When a failure occurs, the Emission Related DTC portion of the I/M System Status display will indicate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is requested. The I/M System Status also registers the number of diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). The first failure of a type "B" DTC does not constitute a final determination of pass or fail, and will not update the I/M System Status to YES. A second trip is required, and all the conditions to run must be met in order for the test to run again. These conditions may include a partial to complete engine cool down. The I/M System Status will update only when an emission related DTC fails the second time, or when all of the tests pass. If there is an impending failure, the system may require more time to run the diagnostic than was allotted in the set procedure. If the test does not run after numerous attempts and no DTC is set, review the appropriate scan tool data list and the service information for an indication of why the test does not complete. Some tests may abort due to changes in the conditions while the test is running. For example, changes in engine load, such as a cooling fan or an A/C compressor clutch turning ON, may cause the test to abort. If a diagnostic test is difficult to run, observe the I/M System Status display while maintaining the necessary enable conditions until the system status updates to YES.

SUMMARY

If no Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) are present and a no-start condition exists, proceed to NO-START DIAGNOSIS in BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES - 8.1L AVALANCHE, SIERRA, SILVERADO, SUBURBAN & YUKON XL article. If no DTCs are present and a driveability condition exists, diagnosis by symptom (i.e., ROUGH IDLE, ENGINE STALLS, etc.). See SYMPTOMS in TROUBLE SHOOTING - NO CODES - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L "C", "G", "H", "K" & "N" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE article.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS

DTC(1) Description(2) Code Type
BXXXX (3)Body Control Systems Malfunction(4)
CXXXX (4)Chassis Control System Malfunction(4)
P0101Mass Air Flow Sensor PerformanceB
P0102MAF Sensor Circuit - Low FrequencyB
P0103MAF Sensor Circuit - High FrequencyB
P0106MAP System PerformanceB
P0107MAP Sensor Circuit - Low VoltageB
P0108MAP Sensor Circuit - High VoltageB
P0112IAT Sensor Circuit - Low VoltageB
P0113IAT Sensor Circuit - High VoltageB
P0116ECT Sensor PerformanceB
P0117ECT Sensor Circuit - Low VoltageB
P0118ECT Sensor Circuit - High VoltageB
P0120TP Sensor CircuitA
P0125Excessive Time To Enter Closed Loop Fuel ControlB
P0128ECT Less Than Thermostat Regulating TemperatureB
P0131HO2S Circuit - Low Voltage - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P0132HO2S Circuit - High Voltage - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P0133HO2S Circuit - Slow Response - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P0134HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Activity - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P0135HO2S Heater Circuit - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P0137HO2S Circuit - Low Voltage - Bank 1, Sensor 2B
P0138HO2S Circuit - High Voltage - Bank 1, Sensor 2B
P0140HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Activity - Bank 1, Sensor 2B
P0141HO2S Heater Circuit - Bank 1, Sensor 2B
P0151HO2S Circuit - Low Voltage - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P0152HO2S Circuit - High Voltage - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P0153HO2S Circuit - Slow Response - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P0154HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Activity - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P0155HO2S Heater Circuit - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P0157HO2S Circuit - Low Voltage - Bank 2, Sensor 2B
P0158HO2S Circuit - High Voltage - Bank 2, Sensor 2B
P0160HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Activity - Bank 2, Sensor 2B
P0161HO2S Heater Circuit - Bank 2, Sensor 2B
P0169Fuel Composition Sensor - High Alcohol Content Detected (5.3L Flex-Fuel)(4)
P0171Fuel Trim System Lean - Bank 1B
P0172Fuel Trim System Rich - Bank 1B
P0174Fuel Trim System Lean - Bank 2B
P0175Fuel Trim System Rich - Bank 2B
P0178Fuel Composition Sensor Circuit Low Voltage(4)
P0179Fuel Composition Sensor Circuit High Voltage(4)
P0200Fuel Injector Control CircuitB
P0218 (5)Transmission Fluid OvertemperatureC
P0220Throttle Position Sensor 2 CircuitA
P0230Fuel Pump Control Relay CircuitB
P0300Engine Misfire DetectedB
P0315Crankshaft Position Sensor Variation Not LearnedA
P0325Knock Sensor Module CircuitB
P0327Knock Sensor Circuit - Low Voltage - Sensor 1B
P0332Knock Sensor Circuit - Low Voltage - Sensor 2B
P0335Crankshaft Position Sensor CircuitB
P0336Crankshaft Position Sensor Circuit PerformanceB
P0341Camshaft Position Sensor Circuit PerformanceB
P0342Camshaft Position Sensor - Signal LowB
P0343Camshaft Position Sensor - Signal HighB
P0351-P0358Ignition Control CircuitB
P0420TWC System - Low Efficiency - Bank 1A
P0430TWC System - Low Efficiency - Bank 2A
P0442EVAP System - Small LeakA
P0443EVAP Purge Solenoid Control CircuitB
P0446EVAP Vent Control CircuitA
P0449EVAP Vent Solenoid Valve Control CircuitB
P0452Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor - Low VoltageB
P0453Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor - High VoltageB
P0455EVAP System Leak Detected - Gross Leak/No FlowA
P0461 (6)Fuel Level Sensor Circuit PerformanceC
P0462 (6)Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - Low VoltageC
P0463 (6)Fuel Level Sensor Circuit - High VoltageC
P0496EVAP System High Purge FlowB
P0500 (7)Vehicle Speed Sensor (M/T)B
P0502 (5)Vehicle Speed Sensor Low OutputB
P0503 (5)Vehicle Speed Sensor ErraticB
P0506Idle Control System - Low RPMB
P0507Idle Control System - High RPMB
P0522 (6)Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit Low VoltageC
P0523 (6)Engine Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High VoltageC
P0530 (8)A/C Refrigerant Pressure Sensor Circuit(4)
P0562 (9)Low System VoltageC
P0563 (9)High System VoltageC
P0567 (10)Cruise Control Resume/Accel Switch CircuitC
P0568 (10)Cruise Control Set/Coast Switch CircuitC
P0571 (10)Cruise Control Brake Switch Circuit(4)
P0601Internal Control Module Memory Check Sum ErrorA
P0602PCM Programming ErrorA
P0604Internal Control Module Random Access Memory ErrorA
P0606ECM/PCM ProcessorA
P0607Control Module PerformanceA
P0608 (6)Vehicle Speed Circuit FaultC
P0609 (11)Vehicle Speed Signal Circuit - Low VoltageC
P0615 (3)Starter Relay Circuit(4)
P06415-Volt Reference Circuit Out Of Range(4)
P0650MIL Control Circuit(12) B
P0651Sensor Reference Voltage Circuit(4)
P0654 (6)Engine Speed Circuit FaultC
P0704 (7)Clutch Pedal Switch Input CircuitB
P0706 (5)Transmission Range SwitchC
P0711 (5)TFT Sensor Circuit - Range/PerformanceC
P0712 (5)TFT Sensor Circuit - Low InputC
P0713 (5)TFT Sensor Circuit - High InputC
P0716 (5)Input/Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Performance(13)
P0717 (5)Input/Turbine Speed Sensor Circuit Low/No Signal(13)
P0719 (5)Brake Switch Circuit MalfunctionC
P0724 (5)Brake Switch Circuit MalfunctionC
P0730 (5)Incorrect Gear RatioC
P0740 (5)TCC Solenoid Valve Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionB
P0741 (5)TCC SystemB
P0742 (5)TCC SystemB
P0748 (5)Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionC
P0751 (5)1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve PerformanceB
P0752 (5)1-2 Shift Solenoid Valve PerformanceB
P0753 (5)1-2 Shift Solenoid Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionB
P0756 (5)2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve PerformanceA
P0757 (5)2-3 Shift Solenoid Valve PerformanceA
P0758 (5)2-3 Shift Solenoid Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionA
P0785 (5)3-2 Shift Solenoid Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionB
P0894 (5)Excessive TCC SlipB
P1106MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent High VoltageC
P1107MAP Sensor Circuit Intermittent Low VoltageC
P1111IAT Sensor Circuit - Intermittent High VoltageC
P1112IAT Sensor Circuit - Intermittent Low VoltageC
P1114ECT Sensor Circuit - Intermittent Low VoltageC
P1115ECT Sensor Circuit - Intermittent High VoltageC
P1125Accelerator Pedal Position Sensors Out Of Range Or DisagreeA
P1133HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Switching - Bank 1, Sensor 1B
P1153HO2S Circuit - Insufficient Switching - Bank 2, Sensor 1B
P1172Secondary Fuel Pump Transfer MalfunctionA
P1258Engine Over-Temperature ConditionA
P1380EBCM DTC Detected Rough Road Data UnstableC
P1381Misfire Detected - No EBCM/PCM Serial DataC
P1514Calculated Vs Actual Airflow Correlation HighA
P1515Predicted Vs Actual Throttle Position Correlation ErrorA
P1516Predicted Vs Actual Throttle Position Correlation ErrorA
P1517TAC Module Processor FaultA
P1518TAC Module Serial Data FaultA
P1571 (11)Invalid Requested Torque SignalC
P1574 (10)Speed Decrease Without Brake LightsC
P1600PCM Memory PerformanceA
P1621PCM Memory PerformanceA
P1626 (14)Theft Deterrent System Loss Of Serial CommunicationC
P1627PCM Memory PerformanceA
P1630 (14)PCM Unable To Learn Passlock Module PasswordC
P1631 (14)Theft Deterrent System Password IncorrectC
P1637 (9)Generator Turn-On Signal Circuit Voltage Out Of RangeC
P1638 (9)Pulse Width Modulated Signal Out Of RangeC
P1644 (11)Delivered Torque Output CircuitC
P1680PCM MemoryA
P1681PCM MemoryA
P1683PCM MemoryB
P1689 (11)Traction Control Delivered Torque Control CircuitC
P1810 (5)TFP Manual Valve Position Switch - Circuit MalfunctionB
P1860 (5)TCC PWM Solenoid CircuitB
P1875 (5)4WD Low Switch Circuit - Electrical MalfunctionB
P2066 (6)Secondary Fuel Level Sender - Lack Of Signal Variation(4)
P2067 (6)Secondary Fuel Level Sender - Lower Than Normal Signal(4)
P2068 (6)Secondary Fuel Level Sender - Higher Than Normal Signal(4)
P2108TAC Module Processor FaultA
P2120APP Sensor 1 Circuit MalfunctionC
P2121APP Sensor Circuits Out Of CorrelationC
P2125APP Sensor 2 Circuit MalfunctionC
P2135TP Sensor Signals 1 & 2 Disagree or Outside Predetermined RangeA
P2610PCM Memory(4)
UXXXX (3)Network Communication System Malfunction(4)
(1) DTC definitions may vary depending on vehicle and/or engine configuration. (2) See CODE TYPES under ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS. (3) See appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. (4) Information is not available from manufacturer. (5) See appropriate DIAGNOSIS article in AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS. (6) See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. (7) See appropriate DIAGNOSIS article in MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS. (8) See appropriate A/C-HEATER SYSTEMS article in AIR CONDITIONING & HEATING. (9) See appropriate GENERATORS & REGULATORS article in STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEMS. (10) See appropriate CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. (11) See appropriate ANTI-LOCK article in BRAKES. (12) DTC P0650 is a type "B" code, but will not illuminate the MIL. (13) DTC P0716 is a type "C" code on all Federal emissions equipped vehicles. DTC P0716 is a type "B" code on all California emissions equipped vehicles. (14) See appropriate ANTI-THEFT SYSTEMS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
(1)DTC definitions may vary depending on vehicle and/or engine configuration.
(2)See CODE TYPES under ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTICS.
(3)See appropriate BODY CONTROL MODULES article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
(4)Information is not available from manufacturer.
(5)See appropriate DIAGNOSIS article in AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONS.
(6)See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
(7)See appropriate DIAGNOSIS article in MANUAL TRANSMISSIONS.
(8)See appropriate A/C-HEATER SYSTEMS article in AIR CONDITIONING & HEATING.
(9)See appropriate GENERATORS & REGULATORS article in STARTING & CHARGING SYSTEMS.
(10)See appropriate CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.
(11)See appropriate ANTI-LOCK article in BRAKES.
(12)DTC P0650 is a type "B" code, but will not illuminate the MIL.
(13)DTC P0716 is a type "C" code on all Federal emissions equipped vehicles. DTC P0716 is a type "B" code on all California emissions equipped vehicles.
(14)See appropriate ANTI-THEFT SYSTEMS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT.

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE INDEX

Scheme 26

Scheme 26: COMPONENT LOCATIONS

Scheme 27

Scheme 27

Scheme 28

Scheme 28

Scheme 29

Scheme 29

Scheme 30

Scheme 30

Scheme 31

Scheme 31

Scheme 32

Scheme 32

Scheme 33

Scheme 33

Scheme 34

Scheme 34

Scheme 35

Scheme 35

Scheme 36

Scheme 36

Scheme 37

Scheme 37

Scheme 38

Scheme 38

Scheme 39

Scheme 39

Scheme 40

Scheme 40

Scheme 41

Scheme 41

Scheme 42

Scheme 42

Scheme 43

Scheme 43

Scheme 44

Scheme 44

Scheme 45

Scheme 45

Scheme 46

Scheme 46

Scheme 47

Scheme 47

Scheme 48

Scheme 48

Scheme 49

Scheme 49

Scheme 50

Scheme 50: CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION

Scheme 51

Scheme 51

Scheme 52

Scheme 52

Scheme 53

Scheme 53

Scheme 54

Scheme 54

Scheme 55

Scheme 55

Scheme 56

Scheme 56

Scheme 57

Scheme 57

Scheme 58

Scheme 58

Scheme 59

Scheme 59

Scheme 60

Scheme 60

Scheme 61

Scheme 61

Scheme 62

Scheme 62

Scheme 63

Scheme 63

Scheme 64

Scheme 64

Scheme 65

Scheme 65

Scheme 66

Scheme 66

Scheme 67

Scheme 67

Scheme 68

Scheme 68

Scheme 69

Scheme 69

Scheme 70

Scheme 70

Scheme 71

Scheme 71

Scheme 72

Scheme 72

Scheme 73

Scheme 73

Scheme 74

Scheme 74

Scheme 75

Scheme 75

Scheme 76

Scheme 76

Scheme 77

Scheme 77

Scheme 78

Scheme 78

Scheme 79

Scheme 79

Scheme 80

Scheme 80

Scheme 81

Scheme 81

Scheme 82

Scheme 82

Scheme 83

Scheme 83

Scheme 84

Scheme 84

Scheme 85

Scheme 85

Scheme 86

Scheme 86

Scheme 87

Scheme 87

Scheme 88

Scheme 88

Scheme 89

Scheme 89

Scheme 90

Scheme 90

Scheme 91

Scheme 91

Scheme 92

Scheme 92

Scheme 93

Scheme 93

Scheme 94

Scheme 94

Scheme 95

Scheme 95

Scheme 96

Scheme 96

Scheme 97

Scheme 97

Scheme 98

Scheme 98

Scheme 99

Scheme 99

Scheme 100

Scheme 100

Scheme 101

Scheme 101

Scheme 102

Scheme 102

Scheme 103

Scheme 103

Scheme 104

Scheme 104

Scheme 105

Scheme 105

Scheme 106

Scheme 106

Scheme 107

Scheme 107

Scheme 108

Scheme 108

Scheme 109

Scheme 109

Scheme 110

Scheme 110

Scheme 111

Scheme 111

Scheme 112

Scheme 112

Scheme 113

Scheme 113

Scheme 114

Scheme 114

Scheme 115

Scheme 115

Scheme 116

Scheme 116

Scheme 117

Scheme 117

Scheme 118

Scheme 118

Scheme 119

Scheme 119

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP INOPERATIVE

Note. For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS article.

Ignition voltage is supplied to the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit. There should be a steady MIL with the ignition ON and the engine OFF.

MIL Operation

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the instrument panel.

MIL Function

  1. The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible.
  2. The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test.
  3. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be stored if a MIL is requested by the PCM.

MIL Illumination

  1. The MIL will illuminate with the ignition ON and the engine not running.
  2. The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started.
  3. The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction.
  4. The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present.
  5. If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON.
  6. If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit.
  1. Did you perform the Diagnostic System Check-Engine Controls? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
  2. Verify whether the instrument cluster is operational. If the Instrument Panel (IP) is completely inoperative, see appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Command the MIL ON and OFF with a scan tool. Does the MIL turn ON and OFF when commanded with a scan tool? If yes, problem is intermittent. See «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If no, go to next step.
  3. Inspect the fuse that supplies ignition voltage to the cluster. Is the fuse open? If yes, go to step 11 . If no, go to next step.
  4. Turn OFF the ignition. Remove the fuse that supplies voltage to the cluster. Disconnect the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) harness connectors. See «COMPONENT LOCATIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) . Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. Measure the voltage from the MIL control circuit in the PCM harness connector to a good ground. Is the voltage less than .3 volt? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 11 .
  5. Turn OFF the ignition. Install the fuse that supplies voltage to the cluster. Turn ON the ignition with the engine OFF. Connect a 3-amp fused jumper wire between the MIL control circuit in the PCM harness connector and a good ground. Is the MIL illuminated? If yes, go to step 9 . If no, go to next step.
  6. Turn OFF the ignition. Remove the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC). See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Turn ON the ignition. Probe the MIL battery positive voltage circuit at the IPC harness connector with a test lamp connected to a good ground. Does the test lamp illuminate? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 12 .
  7. Test the MIL control circuit for an open or high resistance between the PCM and the IPC and repair as necessary. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 15 . If no, go to next step.
  8. Inspect for poor connections at the harness connector of the IPC and repair as necessary. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 15 . If no, go to step 13 .
  9. Inspect for poor connections at the harness connector of the PCM and repair as necessary. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 15 . If no, go to step 14 .
  10. Repair the short to ground in the MIL battery positive voltage circuit. Replace the fuse. After repairs, go to step 15 .
  11. Repair the short to voltage in the MIL control circuit. After repairs, go to step 15 .
  12. Repair the open in the ignition voltage circuit. After repairs, go to step 15 .
  13. Repair or replace the IPC. See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. After repairs, go to step 15 .
  14. Replace the PCM. See appropriate REMOVAL, OVERHAUL & INSTALLATION article. Reprogram PCM. See «POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__powertrain-control-module) under PROGRAMMING. After repairs, go to next step.
  15. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds. Does the vehicle operate correctly, without any MIL illumination and without any stored DTCs? If yes, system is okay. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) .

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP ALWAYS ON

Note. For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS article.

Battery positive voltage is supplied directly to the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL). The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) turns the MIL ON by grounding the MIL control circuit.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) is located on the instrument panel.

MIL Function

  1. The MIL informs the driver that a malfunction has occurred and the vehicle should be taken in for service as soon as possible.
  2. The MIL illuminates during a bulb test and a system test.
  3. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will be stored if a MIL is requested by the diagnostic.

MIL Illumination

  1. The MIL will illuminate with the ignition ON and the engine not running.
  2. The MIL will turn OFF when the engine is started.
  3. The MIL will remain ON if the self-diagnostic system has detected a malfunction.
  4. The MIL may turn OFF if the malfunction is not present.
  5. If the MIL is illuminated and then the engine stalls, the MIL will remain illuminated so long as the ignition switch is ON.
  6. If the MIL is not illuminated and the engine stalls, the MIL will not illuminate until the ignition switch is cycled OFF, then ON.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step determines if the condition is with the MIL control circuit or the PCM.
  1. Did you perform the Diagnostic System Check-Engine Controls? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
  2. Turn OFF the ignition. Disconnect the PCM. See «COMPONENT LOCATIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) . Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Observe the MIL. Is the MIL illuminated? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 5 .
  3. Remove the Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC). See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. Test the MIL control circuit for a short to ground between the PCM and the IPC. Did you find and correct the condition? If yes, go to step 6 . If no, go to next step.
  4. Repair or replace the IPC. See appropriate ANALOG INSTRUMENT PANELS article in ACCESSORIES & EQUIPMENT. After repairs, go to step 6 .
  5. Replace the PCM. See appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article. Reprogram PCM. See «POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__powertrain-control-module) under PROGRAMMING. After repairs, go to next step.
  6. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds. Does the vehicle operate correctly, without any MIL illumination and without any stored DTCs? If yes, system is okay. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) .

If the problem is intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

DIAGNOSTIC TESTS

Note. Before clearing DTCs, perform powertrain diagnostic system check. See DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. Record FREEZE FRAME and FAILURE RECORDS for reference during testing. Data will be erased when DTCs are cleared. If PCM is replaced, NEW PCM must be programmed using special manufacturer's equipment. See POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE under PROGRAMMING.

DTC P0101: MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR PERFORMANCE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor is an air flow meter that measures the amount of air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the MAF sensor signal in order to provide the correct fuel delivery for all engine speeds and loads. A small quantity of air entering the engine indicates a deceleration or idle. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load condition. The MAF sensor has an ignition 1 voltage circuit, a ground circuit, and a signal circuit. The PCM applies a voltage to the sensor on the signal circuit. The sensor uses the voltage in order to produce a frequency based on inlet air flow through the sensor bore. The frequency varies within a range of around 2,000 Hertz at idle to about 10,000 Hertz at maximum engine load. The PCM uses the following sensor inputs in order to calculate a predicted MAF value

  1. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP).
  2. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT).
  3. Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT).
  4. The engine speed (RPM).

The PCM compares the actual MAF sensor frequency signal to the predicted MAF value. This comparison will determine if the signal is stuck based on a lack of variation, or is too low or too high for a given operating condition. DTC P0101 sets if the actual MAF sensor frequency signal is not within a predetermined range of the calculated MAF value.

Conditions For Running DTC

  1. DTCs P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0120, P0220, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0449, P0455, P0496, P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine is cranking or running.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 11 volts and 18 volts.
  4. The Throttle Position (TP) sensor angle is less than 95 percent.
  5. The change in the TP sensor angle is less than 5 percent.
  6. The MAP sensor is more than 17 kPa.
  7. The change in the MAP sensor is less than 3 kPa.
  8. The above conditions are met for 1.5 seconds.

Conditions For Setting DTC

The PCM detects that the actual MAF sensor frequency signal is not within a predetermined range of the calculated MAF value for more than 4 seconds.

Action Taken When DTC Sets

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.

Conditions For Clearing MIL/DTC

  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

Inspect for the following conditions

  1. An incorrectly routed harness. Inspect the harness of the MAF sensor in order to verify that it is not routed too close to the following components: The secondary ignition wires or coils. Any solenoids. Any relays. Any motors.
  2. A low minimum air rate through the sensor bore may cause this DTC to set at idle or during deceleration. Inspect for any vacuum leaks downstream of the MAF sensor.
  3. Inspect for any contamination or debris on the sensing elements of the MAF sensor.
  4. Inspect the air induction system for any water intrusion. Any water that reaches the MAF sensor will skew the sensor and may cause this DTC to set.
  5. A wide open throttle acceleration from a stop should cause the MAF sensor g/s display on the scan tool to increase rapidly. This increase should be from 3-10 g/s at idle to 170 g/s or more at the time of the 1-2 shift. If the increase is not observed, inspect for a restriction in the induction system or the exhaust system.
  6. A high resistance of 15 ohms or more on the ignition 1 voltage circuit may cause this DTC to set. A high resistance may cause a driveability concern before this DTC sets.
  7. The barometric pressure that is used in order to calculate the predicted mass air flow value is initially based on the MAP sensor at key ON. When the engine is running, the MAP sensor value is continually updated near wide open throttle. A skewed MAP sensor will cause the calculated mass air flow value to be inaccurate. The value shown for the MAP sensor display varies with the altitude. With the ignition ON and the engine OFF, 103 kPa is the approximate value near sea level. This value will decrease by approximately 3 kPa for every 1000 feet (305 meters) of altitude.
  8. A high resistance on the 5-volt reference circuit of the MAP sensor may cause this DTC to set.
  9. A high resistance on the low reference circuit of the MAP sensor may cause this DTC to set.
  10. If the condition is intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step will determine if the MAP sensor pressure is within the proper range for a given altitude.
  2. 6 This step will determine if the MAP sensor voltage is within the proper range at idle.
  3. 7 This step will determine if the MAP sensor responds properly to the change in manifold pressure.
  4. 8 This step will determine if the TP sensors are operating properly.
  5. 9 This step will determine if any mechanical faults have caused this DTC to set.
  6. 10 This voltage drop test will determine if high resistance has caused this DTC to set.

Scheme 120

Scheme 120: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 121

Scheme 121
Altitude Feet (m) (1)Barometric Pressure kPa
1000 (-305)101-105
Sea Level96-104
1000 (305)94-102
2000 (610)90-98
3000 (914)87-95
4000 (1219)83-91
5000 (1524)80-88
6000 (1829)77-85
7000 (2134)74-82
8000 (2438)71-79
9000 (2743)69-77
10,000 (3048)66-74
11,000 (3353)64-72
12,000 (3658)61-69
13,000 (3962)58-66
14,000 (4267)56-64
(1) Determine your altitude by contacting a local weather station or by using another reference source.
(1)Determine your altitude by contacting a local weather station or by using another reference source.

ALTITUDE VS. BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

DTC P0102: MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW FREQUENCY

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor is an air flow meter that measures the amount of air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the MAF sensor signal in order to provide the correct fuel delivery for a wide range of engine speeds and loads. A small quantity of air entering the engine indicates a deceleration or idle. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load condition. The MAF sensor has an ignition 1 voltage circuit, a ground circuit, and a signal circuit. The PCM applies a voltage to the sensor on the signal circuit. The sensor uses the voltage in order to produce a frequency based on inlet air flow through the sensor bore. The frequency varies within a range of around 2,000 Hertz at idle to about 10,000 Hertz at maximum engine load. DTC P0102 sets if the PCM detects a frequency signal lower than the possible range of a properly operating MAF sensor.

  1. The engine is running for more than 2 seconds.
  2. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is more than 8 volts.
  4. The MAF sensor frequency is stable for more than one second.

The PCM detects that the MAF sensor frequency signal is less than 1200 Hz for more than 0.6 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the harness of the MAF sensor to verify that it is not routed too close to the following components: The secondary ignition wires or coils. Any solenoids. Any relays. Any motors.
  2. A low minimum air rate through the sensor bore at idle or during deceleration may cause this DTC to set. Inspect for any vacuum leak downstream of the MAF sensor.
  3. Inspect for any contamination or debris on the sensing elements of the MAF sensor.
  4. A wide open throttle acceleration from a stop should cause the MAF sensor g/s parameter on the scan tool to increase rapidly. This increase should be from 3-10 g/s at idle to 170 g/s or more at the time of the 1-2 shift. If the increase is not observed, inspect for a restriction in the induction system or the exhaust system.
  5. A high resistance of 15 ohms or more on the ground circuit of the MAF sensor may cause this DTC to set. A high resistance may cause a driveability concern before this DTC sets.
  6. A high resistance of 15 ohms or more on the ignition 1 voltage circuit can cause this DTC to set. A high resistance may cause a driveability concern before this DTC sets.
  7. If the condition is intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step will determine if any mechanical faults have caused this DTC to set.
  2. 7 This voltage drop test will determine if high resistance has caused this DTC to set.
  3. 9 This step verifies the signal circuit from the MAF sensor electrical connector to the PCM.
  4. 10 This step tests the signal circuit of the MAF sensor for a short to another 5-volt reference circuit.
  5. 11 This step will determine if the PCM is able to process the frequency signal that it receives from the MAF sensor.
  6. 14 This step will determine which portion of the circuit or which component is shorted to ground.
  7. 17 This step verifies that the signal circuit is not shorted to any other PCM circuit.

Scheme 122

Scheme 122: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 123

Scheme 123

Scheme 124

Scheme 124

DTC P0103: MAF SENSOR CIRCUIT - HIGH FREQUENCY

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Mass Air Flow (MAF) sensor is an air flow meter that measures the amount of air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the MAF sensor signal in order to provide the correct fuel delivery for a wide range of engine speeds and loads. A small quantity of air entering the engine indicates a deceleration or idle. A large quantity of air entering the engine indicates an acceleration or high load condition. The MAF sensor has an ignition 1 voltage circuit, a ground circuit, and a signal circuit. The PCM applies a voltage to the sensor on the signal circuit. The sensor uses the voltage in order to produce a frequency based on inlet air flow through the sensor bore. The frequency varies within a range of around 2,000 Hertz at idle to about 10,000 Hertz at maximum engine load. DTC P0103 sets if the PCM detects a frequency signal higher than the possible range of a properly operating MAF sensor.

  1. The engine is running for more than 2 seconds.
  2. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is more than 8 volts.
  4. The MAF sensor parameter is stable for more than one second.

The PCM detects that the MAF sensor frequency signal is more than 13,500 Hertz for more than 1.2 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the air induction system for any water intrusion. The water rapidly cools the hot sensing elements in the sensor causing a false indication of excessive air flow. Any water that reaches the MAF sensor will skew the sensor and may cause this DTC to set.
  2. A poor connection in the ignition 1 voltage circuit of the MAF sensor may cause this DTC to set.
  3. If the condition is intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step tests for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) on the signal circuit of the MAF sensor. A frequency reading with the MAF sensor disconnected indicates an EMI related fault or a poor connection at the PCM. Disconnecting the MAF sensor may set additional related DTCs.
  2. 4 This step will determine if incorrect harness routing has caused this DTC to set.
  3. 5 This step will determine if water intrusion has caused this DTC to set.

Scheme 125

Scheme 125: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0106: MAP SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits

  1. 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. Low reference circuit.
  3. MAP sensor signal circuit.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The PCM also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The PCM should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The PCM should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the Barometric (BARO) pressure. This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range.

The PCM calculates a predicted value for the MAP sensor based on throttle position and engine speed. The PCM then compares the predicted value to the actual MAP sensor signal. The DTC P0106 will set if the MAP sensor signal is not within the predicted range.

  1. DTC P0101, P0102, P0103, P0107, P0108, P0120, P0220, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0455, P1125, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, P2120, P2121, P2125, P2126, P2130, P2131, P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine speed is between 400-5,000 RPM.
  3. The change in engine speed is less than 125 RPM.
  4. Traction control, if equipped, is not active.
  5. The A/C compressor clutch is steady.
  6. The power steering is stable.
  7. The power take-off (PTO), if equipped, is not active.
  8. The clutch switch state does not change, if equipped with a manual transmission.
  9. The brake switch state does not change.
  10. The above conditions are met for 1 second.

The PCM detects that the MAP sensor voltage is not within the predicted range for 2 seconds.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the PCM stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the PCM records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The PCM writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The PCM turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 This step tests the MAP sensors ability to correctly indicate Barometric (BARO) pressure.
  2. 6 This step tests the MAP sensors ability to respond to an increase in engine vacuum.
  3. 8 This step tests for a proper MAP sensor pressure with an applied vacuum.

Scheme 126

Scheme 126: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 127

Scheme 127

Scheme 128

Scheme 128

DTC P0107: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits

  1. 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. Low reference circuit.
  3. MAP sensor signal circuit.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The PCM also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the intake manifold. The PCM should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The PCM should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the Barometric (BARO) pressure. This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively low, DTC P0107 will set.

  1. DTC P0120, P0220, P1125, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, P2120, P2121, P2125, P2126, P2130, P2131, P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine is running.
  3. The throttle angle is zero percent when the engine speed is less than 800 RPM, or the throttle angle is more than 12.5 percent when the engine speed is more than 800 RPM.

The PCM detects that the MAP sensor voltage is less than 0.10 volt for more than 4 seconds.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 Operate the vehicle within the same conditions as when the DTC failed. If you cannot duplicate the DTC, the information included in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records can help to locate an intermittent condition.

Scheme 129

Scheme 129: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 130

Scheme 130

DTC P0108: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits

  1. 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. Low reference circuit.
  3. MAP sensor signal circuit.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The PCM also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the intake manifold. The PCM should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The PCM should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the Barometric (BARO) pressure. This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is excessively high, DTC P0108 will set.

  1. DTC P0120, P0220, P1125, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, P2120, P2121, P2125, P2126, P2130, P2131, P2135 are not set.
  2. Engine is running.
  3. The throttle angle is less than one percent when the engine speed is less than 1,200 RPM, or the throttle angle is less than 20 percent when the engine speed is more than 1,200 RPM.

The PCM detects that the MAP sensor voltage is more than 4.9 volts for more than 4 seconds.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the PCM stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the PCM records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The PCM writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 Operate the vehicle within the same conditions as when the DTC failed. If you cannot duplicate the DTC, use the information included in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records data in order to locate an intermittent condition

Scheme 131

Scheme 131: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 132

Scheme 132

DTC P0112: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor. The IAT sensor has a signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The IAT sensor measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the IAT signal circuit. When the IAT sensor is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the air temperature increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the IAT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an excessively low IAT signal voltage, indicating a high temperature, DTC P0112 sets.

  1. DTCs P0502, P0503 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 45 seconds.
  3. The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) indicates that vehicle speed is more than 25 MPH.

The IAT is more than 262°F (128°C) for 5 seconds.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the PCM records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The PCM writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The PCM turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. When the vehicle is at ambient temperature the IAT sensor and ECT sensor temperatures should be relatively close to each other.
  2. If an intermittent condition exists, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 133

Scheme 133: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0113: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor. The IAT sensor has a signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The IAT sensor measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the IAT signal circuit. When the IAT sensor is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the air temperature increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the IAT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an excessively high IAT signal voltage, indicating a low temperature, DTC P0113 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0128, P0502, P0503 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 120 seconds.
  3. The Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) indicates that vehicle speed is less than 7 MPH.
  4. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is more than 140°F (60°C).
  5. The Mass Air Flow (MAF) is less than 15 g/s.

The PCM detects that the IAT Sensor parameter is less than -38°C (-36°F) for more than 5 seconds.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the PCM stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the PCM records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The PCM writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The PCM turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. When the vehicle is at ambient temperature the IAT sensor and ECT sensor temperatures should be relatively close to each other.
  2. If a short to a separate 5-volt source occurs, this DTC may set. If this condition exists, a continuity test to all other PCM 5-volt reference circuits will be necessary.
  3. If an intermittent condition exists, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The number below refer to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 6 This step tests for the proper operation of the circuit in the low voltage range. If the fuse in the jumper opens when you perform this test, the signal circuit is shorted to voltage.

Scheme 134

Scheme 134: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 135

Scheme 135

DTC P0116: ECT SENSOR PERFORMANCE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the signal circuit and a ground for the ECT low reference circuit. When the ECT is low, the sensor resistance is high. When the ECT is high, the sensor resistance is low. The PCM uses this high side coolant rationality test to determine if the ECT input is skewed high. The internal clock of the PCM will record the amount of time the ignition is OFF. At restart the PCM will compare the temperature difference between the ECT and the Intake Air Temperature (IAT). Before failing this test the PCM will perform a calculation to determine the presence of a block heater. If the PCM detects that the temperature difference is not within the calibrated range after the ignition OFF time, DTC P0116 sets.

  1. The ignition is ON.
  2. DTCs P0112, P0113, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0128, P0601, P0602, P1621, P1683 are not set.
  3. The start-up IAT is more than 59°F (15°C).
  4. The vehicle has a minimum ignition OFF time of 10 hours.
  5. This DTC will only run once during the ignition cycle within the enabling conditions.

If the PCM detects a temperature difference between the ECT sensor and the IAT sensor of more than 27°F (15°C), then the vehicle must be driven for more than 400 seconds over 15 mph. If the IAT sensor temperature decreases more than 5°F (3°C), a block heater is detected and the test is aborted. If the IAT sensor temperature does not decrease, a block heater was not detected and DTC P0116 sets.

  1. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the PCM stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the PCM records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The Powertrain Control Module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 7 A snapshot is the quickest method to capture the data before it changes.
  2. 8 An IAT sensor that is skewed low can cause this DTC to set.
  3. 10 This step will determine if high resistance has caused this DTC to set.
  4. 12 A high resistance short from the signal circuit to the low reference circuit can cause this DTC to set.

Scheme 136

Scheme 136: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 137

Scheme 137
Temperature - °F (°C)(1) Ohms
302 (150)47
284 (140)60
266 (130)77
248 (120)100
230 (110)132
212 (100)177
194 (90)241
176 (80)332
158 (70)467
140 (60)667
122 (50)973
113 (45)1188
104 (40)1459
95 (35)1802
86 (30)2238
77 (25)2796
68 (20)3520
59 (15)4450
50 (10)5670
41 (5)7280
32 (0)9420
23 (-5)12,300
14 (-10)16,180
5 (-15)21,450
4 (-20)28,680
22 (-30)52,700
40 (-40)100,700
(1) Measure resistance across sensor terminals.
(1)Measure resistance across sensor terminals.

SENSOR TEMPERATURE VS. RESISTANCE

DTC P0117: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor, that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the ECT signal circuit. When the ECT is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the ECT increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the ECT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the ECT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an excessively low ECT signal voltage, which is a high temperature indication, this Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.

The engine run time is more than 10 seconds; or, the engine run time is less than 10 seconds when IAT is less than 122°F (50°C).

The ECT sensor temperature is more than 282°F (139°C) for more than 20 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.

Conditions For Clearing MIL or DTC

  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. An overheating condition may cause this DTC to set.
  2. After starting the engine, the ECT sensor temperature should rise steadily to about 194°F (90°C) then stabilize after the thermostat opens.
  3. Use the Temperature vs. Resistance Value Table in order to test the ECT sensor at various temperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of a skewed sensor. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability concerns. See appropriate SENSOR OPERATING RANGE CHARTS article.
  4. If the malfunction is not present at this time, See «DTC P1114: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__dtc-p1114-ect-sensor-circuit) .
  5. If an intermittent condition exists, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 138

Scheme 138: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0118: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor, that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The ECT sensor has a signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the ECT signal circuit and a ground for the ECT low reference circuit. When the ECT is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the ECT increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the ECT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the ECT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an excessively high ECT signal voltage, which is a low temperature indication, DTC P0118 sets.

The engine has been running for more than 60 seconds; or, the engine run time is less than 60 seconds when the Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is more than 32°F (0°C).

The ECT sensor temperature is less than -36°F (-38°C) for 20 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. If a short to a separate 5-volt source occurs, this DTC may set.
  2. After starting the engine, the ECT should rise steadily to about 194°F (90°C) then stabilize after the thermostat opens.
  3. Use the Temperature vs. Resistance Table in order to test the ECT sensor at various temperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of a skewed sensor. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability concerns. See appropriate SENSOR OPERATING RANGE CHARTS article.
  4. If a malfunction is not present at this time, see «DTC P1115: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__dtc-p1115-ect-sensor-circuit) .
  5. If an intermittent condition exists, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 139

Scheme 139: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 140

Scheme 140

DTC P0120: TP SENSOR CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Position (TP) sensor 1 is a potentiometer type sensor with 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The TP sensor is used to determine the throttle plate angle for various engine management systems. The control module provides the TP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The TP sensor then provides the control module a signal and increases as the throttle opens. When the control module detects that the TP sensor 1 signal or TP sensor 5-volt reference voltage is outside the predetermined range, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. The TP sensor 1 signal voltage is less than 0.37 volt or more than 4.51 volts.
  2. The above condition is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power Mode.
  4. Under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  5. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs of water intrusion. When this occurs, multiple DTCs could be set with no circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than one TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing one individual condition may correct more than one DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Keep this in mind when reviewing the stored information, Capture info.
  3. If this DTC is determined to be intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 33 When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than one TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the may redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing one individual condition may correct more than one DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Keep this in mind when reviewing the stored information, Capture info.

Scheme 141

Scheme 141: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 142

Scheme 142

Scheme 143

Scheme 143

Scheme 144

Scheme 144

DTC P0125: EXCESSIVE TIME TO ENTER CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

An Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor monitors the coolant temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses this input for engine control, and for an enabling criteria for some diagnostics. The air flow coming into the engine is accumulated. The air flow is used in order to determine if the engine has been driven within conditions that would allow the engine coolant to heat normally to the thermostat-regulating temperature. If the coolant temperature does not increase normally, or if the coolant temperature does not reach regulating temperature of the thermostat, diagnostics that use engine coolant temperature as enabling criteria may not run when expected. This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will only run once per ignition cycle, within the enabling conditions. This DTC will set when there has been excessive time to reach Closed Loop fuel control.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0500, P0502, P0503, P1111, P1112, P1114, or P1115 are not present.
  2. The engine run time is between 120-1600 seconds.
  3. The minimum air temperature is 19° F (-7° C).
  4. The start-up coolant temperature is less than 83°F (28.5°C).
  5. The Mass Air Flow (MAF) is between 20-75 g/s with the average more than 15 g/s.
  6. The vehicle speed is more than 5 MPH for more than 0.5 mi.
  7. This diagnostic has not previously run this ignition cycle.
  1. The PCM detects that the calibrated amount of engine run time has been met.
  2. The calibrated amount of engine air flow has been met.
  3. The engine coolant temperature for Closed Loop of 90° F (34° C) has not been met.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

DTC P0125 is designed to detect a skewed ECT sensor or a faulty thermostat.

Excessive coolant flow through the by-pass hose to the throttle body may cause this DTC to set.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step tests for excessive resistance in the ECT circuit.
  2. 7 This step tests for a skewed sensor through the range of temperatures affecting this DTC.

Scheme 145

Scheme 145: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0128: ECT LESS THAN THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

An Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor monitors the temperature of the coolant. This input is used by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) for engine control and as an enabling criteria for some diagnostics. The air flow coming into the engine is accumulated and used to determine if the engine has been driven within conditions that would allow the engine coolant to heat up normally to the thermostat regulating temperature. If the coolant temperature does not increase normally or does not reach regulating temperature of the thermostat, diagnostics that use engine coolant temperature as enabling criteria, may not run when expected. This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will only run once per ignition cycle within the enabling conditions. If the engine coolant fails to reach a preset target temperature before a calculated air flow is accumulated, DTC P0128 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0500, P0502, P0503, P1111, P1112, P1114, or P1115 are not present.
  2. The start-up engine coolant temperature is less than 158°F (70°C).
  3. The Air Intake Temperature (IAT) sensor is 19°F (-7°C) or more.
  4. The engine is running more than 2 minutes and less than 27 minutes.
  5. The vehicle speed is more than 5 MPH for more than 1.5 miles.
  6. The mass airflow (MAF) average reading is between 20-75 g/s with an average of more than 15 g/s.
  7. The diagnostic has not previously run this ignition cycle.
  1. The calibrated amount of engine run time has been met.
  2. The calibrated amount of engine air flow has been met.
  3. The calibrated minimum engine coolant temperature of 167° F (75° C) has not been met.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. A DTC P0128 is designed to detect a faulty thermostat.
  2. Excessive coolant flow through the by-pass hose to the throttle body may cause this DTC to set.
  3. A skewed ECT sensor may cause a P0128 to set.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step tests for excessive resistance in the ECT circuit.
  2. 7 This step tests for a skewed sensor through the range of temperatures affecting this DTC.

Scheme 146

Scheme 146: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0131: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0151: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Scheme 147

Scheme 147: DTC P0131: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0151: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - B

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS article. For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION .

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects an HO2S voltage that stays below a specified value, DTCs P0131 or P0151 will set.

Lean Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The TP indicated Angle parameter is between 3-70 percent more than the value observed at idle.

Power Enrichment Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The engine run time parameter is more than 30 seconds.
  6. The power enrichment parameter is active for more than 2 seconds.

Lean Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is less than 200 mV for 165 seconds.

Power Enrichment Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is less than 400 mV for 10 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands Open Loop.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage is below the specified value the condition is not present.

Scheme 148

Scheme 148: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 149

Scheme 149

DTC P0132: HO2S CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0152: HO2S CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects an HO2S voltage that stays below a specified value, DTCs P0131 or P0151 will set.

Rich Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The TP indicated angle parameter is between 3-70 percent more than the value observed.

Decel Fuel Cut-off Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The engine run time parameter is more than 30 seconds.
  6. The Decel. Fuel Cutoff parameter is active for more than 4 seconds.

Rich Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is more than 900 mV for 165 seconds.

Decel Fuel Cut-off Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is more than 250 mV for 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands Open Loop.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage is above and below the specified value the condition is not present.

Scheme 150

Scheme 150: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 151

Scheme 151

DTC P0133: HO2S CIRCUIT - SLOW RESPONSE - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0153: HO2S CIRCUIT - SLOW RESPONSE - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. This diagnostic will only run once per ignition cycle. The PCM monitors the rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich transition time. A transition is defined as, the HO2S voltage changes from above 625 mV to below 250 mV or from below 250 mV to above 652 mV. If the PCM detects that the transition time is too long, DTCs P0133 or P0153 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0117, P0116, P0118, P0120, P0131, P0132, P0134, P0135, P0151, P0152, P0154, P0155, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is more than 149°F (65°C).
  3. The Evaporative (EVAP) emissions purge solenoid command is more than 1 percent.
  4. The mass airflow (MAF) sensor is between 23-50 g/s.
  5. The engine speed is between 1200-3000 RPM.
  6. The TP Indicated Angle parameter is 5 percent more than the value observed at idle.
  7. The loop status is closed.
  8. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  9. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  10. The engine run time is more than 160 seconds.
  11. The above conditions are met for 50 seconds.

The rich-to- lean and lean-to-rich average response time is more than a calibrated value.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage is varying above and below the specified value, the condition is not present.

Scheme 152

Scheme 152: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 153

Scheme 153

DTC P0134: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT ACTIVITY - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0154: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT ACTIVITY - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content in the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mv that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects that the HO2S voltage remains within the bias voltage range, DTCs P0134 or P0154 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 300 seconds.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.

The PCM detects that the affected HO2S voltage parameter is between 350-550 mV for 60 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands Open Loop.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 If the HO2S voltage is varying outside the specified range, the condition is not present.

Scheme 154

Scheme 154: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 155

Scheme 155

DTC P0135: HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P0155: HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. A heating element inside the HO2S minimizes the time required for the sensor to reach operating temperature. Voltage is provided to the heater by the ignition 1 voltage circuit through a fuse. With the engine running, ground is provided to the heater by the HO2S heater low control circuit, through a low side driver within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM commands the heater ON or OFF to maintain a specific HO2S operating temperature range. The PCM determines the temperature by measuring the current flow through the heater. When the heater is in the ON state, the PCM will pulse the heater OFF for a duration of 50 ms, once per second. The PCM also monitors the current flow through the heater for diagnosis. This diagnostic will only run once per ignition cycle. If the PCM detects that the current is above or below a specified range, DTC P0135 or P0155 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, or P02108 are not set.
  2. The ECT Sensor parameter is more than 122°F (50° C).
  3. The Ignition 1 Signal parameter is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The MAF sensor parameter is between 3-40 g/s.
  5. The engine speed parameter is between 500-3000 RPM.
  6. The engine run time parameter is more than 120 seconds.
  1. The PCM detects that the affected HO2S Heater current parameter is less than 0.25 amps, or more than 1.375 amps (4.8L) or 3.125 amps (5.3L & 6.0L).
  2. The above condition is met for 10 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 7 With no fault present, the test lamp will blink once per second.

Scheme 156

Scheme 156: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 157

Scheme 157

DTC P0137: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - BANK 1, SENSOR 2 & DTC P0157: HO2S CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - BANK 2, SENSOR 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects an HO2S voltage that stays below a specified value, DTCs P0137 or P0157 will set.

Lean Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1517, P1518 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The TP Indicated Angle parameter is between 3-70 percent more than the value observed at idle.

Power Enrichment Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1517, P1518 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The engine run time parameter is more than 30 seconds.
  6. The power enrichment parameter is active for more than 2 seconds.

Lean Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is less than 80 mV for 200 seconds.

Power Enrichment Test

  1. The HO2S voltage is less than 490 mV for 10 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage does not change more than the specified value, the condition is present.

Scheme 158

Scheme 158: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 159

Scheme 159

Scheme 160

Scheme 160

DTC P0138: HO2S CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE - BANK 1, SENSOR 2 & DTC P0158: HO2S CIRCUIT - HIGH VOLTAGE - BANK 2, SENSOR 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects an HO2S voltage that stays below a specified value, DTCs P0138 or P0158 will set.

Rich Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The TP indicated angle parameter is between 3-70 percent more than the value observed at idle.

Decel Fuel Cut-off Test Enable

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The loop status is closed.
  3. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  5. The engine run time parameter is more than 30 seconds.
  6. The Decel. Fuel Cutoff parameter is active for more than 4 seconds.

Rich Test

  1. The PCM detects that the affected HO2S voltage parameter is more than 950 mV for 200 seconds.

Decel Fuel Cut-Off Test

  1. The PCM detects that the affected HO2S voltage parameter is more than 250 mV for 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage does not change more than the specified value, the condition is present.

Scheme 161

Scheme 161: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 162

Scheme 162

Scheme 163

Scheme 163

DTC P0140: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT ACTIVITY - BANK 1, SENSOR 2 & DTC P0160: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT ACTIVITY - BANK 2, SENSOR 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (O2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compares the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. If the PCM detects an HO2S voltage that stays below a specified value, DTCs P0140 or P0160 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0141, P0161, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 300 seconds.
  3. The loop status is closed.
  4. The ignition 1 signal is between 10-18 volts.
  1. The HO2S signal voltage is steady between 410-490 mV for 150 seconds.
  2. The Throttle Position (TP) changes more than 5 percent within 1 second, 6 times.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 If the voltage is varying above and below the specified value, the condition is not present.

Scheme 164

Scheme 164: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 165

Scheme 165

DTC P0141: HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT - BANK 1, SENSOR 2 & DTC P0161: HO2S HEATER CIRCUIT - BANK 2, SENSOR 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

The Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. A heating element inside the HO2S minimizes the time required for the sensor to reach operating temperature. Voltage is provided to the heater by the ignition one voltage circuit through a fuse. With the engine running, ground is provide to the heater by the HO2S heater low control circuit, through a low side driver within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The PCM commands the heater ON or OFF to maintain a specific HO2S operating temperature range. The PCM determines the temperature by measuring the current flow through the heater. When the heater is in the ON state, the PCM will pulse the heater OFF for a duration of 50 ms, once per second. the PCM also monitors the current flow through the heater for diagnosis. The diagnostic will only run once per ignition cycle. If the PCM detects that the current is above or below a specified range, DTC P0141 or P0161 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The ECT sensor parameter is more than 122° F (50° C).
  3. The ignition 1 signal parameter is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The MAF sensor parameter is between 3-40 g/s.
  5. The engine speed parameter is between 500-3000 RPM.
  6. The engine run time parameter is more than 120 seconds.
  1. The PCM detects that the affected HO2S Heater current parameter is less than 0.25 amps, or more than 1.375 amps (4.8L 7 6.0L) or 3.125 amps (5.3L).
  2. The above condition is met for 10 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 7 With no fault present, the test lamp will blink once per second.

Scheme 166

Scheme 166: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 167

Scheme 167

DTC P0169: FUEL COMPOSITION SENSOR - HIGH ALCOHOL CONTENT DETECTED (5.3L FLEX-FUEL)

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses information from the IAT and the ECT sensors to determine ambient temperature at cold start-up. Alcohol content (percentage) information is supplied to the PCM fro the fuel composition sensor. This information is used by the technician in diagnosing symptom related complaints such as hard starting in cold ambient temperatures. The PCM monitors the fuel frequency during the first 30 seconds of run time. When the PCM detects alcohol content that is too high for a given ambient temperature, this DTC sets.

The ECT and IAT have less than 8°F (4.5°C) difference at cold start up.

If the fuel composition is above the given threshold for the ambient temperature, for 25 seconds of the 30 second interval.

  1. The control module stores the DTC in history after the first failure but will not illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL).
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores the failure information in the scan tool Freeze Frame and Failure Records.
  1. A history DTC will clear if no fault conditions have been detected for 40 warm-up cycles.
  2. A warm-up cycle occurs when the coolant temperature has risen 40°F (22°C) from the start-up coolant temperature and the engine coolant temperature exceeds 160°F (70°C) during the same ignition cycle.
  3. Use the scan tool Clear Information function.
  1. The system is designed for use of regular unleaded fuel to any ethanol concentration up to 85 percent (E85).
  2. When the ambient temperature drops below 14°F (-10°C), a winter blend of 70 percent (E70), or less is recommended for cold weather starting.
  3. The use of methanol fuels may set this DTC.
  4. Use of methanol fuel or high concentration of ethanol may cause DTCs P0169 and P0179 to set.
  5. Other contamination such as water and salts may cause this DTC to set.

The table below shows the maximum thresholds of a given ethanol content (percentage) versus the ambient temperature at which a DTC P0169 will set. See ETHANOL CONTENT VS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE .

TemperatureEthanol ContentFrequency Hz
40°F (-40°C) And Colder55%105
From -22-14°F (-30 To -10°C)76%126
23°F (-5°C)81%131
32°F (0°C) And Warmer88%138

ETHANOL CONTENT VS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE

The numbers below refer to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 The frequency read on the scan tool should be stable. A lower reading that momentarily rises above 100 Hz may indicate that water droplets in the fuel are present.

Scheme 168

Scheme 168: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0171: FUEL TRIM SYSTEM LEAN - BANK 1 & DTC P0174: FUEL TRIM SYSTEM LEAN - BANK 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the air/fuel metering system in order to provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy, and emission control. Fuel delivery is controlled differently during Open and Closed Loop. During Open Loop, the PCM determines fuel delivery based on sensor signals without oxygen sensor (O2S) input. During Closed Loop, the O2S inputs are added and used by the PCM to calculate short and long term fuel trim fuel delivery adjustments. If the O2S indicate a lean condition, fuel trim values will be above 0 percent. If the O2S indicate a rich condition, fuel trim values will be below 0 percent. Short term fuel trim values change rapidly in response to the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) voltage signals. Long term fuel trim makes coarse adjustment s in order to maintain an air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1. If the PCM detects an excessively lean condition, DTC P0171 or P0174 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0103, P0108, P0135, P0137, P0141, P0200, P0300, P0410, P0420, P0430, P0440, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0449, P0506, P0507 or P1441 are not set.
  2. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 167-239°F (75-115°C).
  3. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 4-194° F (-20-90° C).
  4. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) is between 3.7-13 psi (26-90 kPa).
  5. The vehicle speed is less than 85 mph (137 km/h).
  6. The engine speed is between 400-3000 RPM.
  7. The Barometric pressure (BARO) is more than 10.7 psi (74 kPa).
  8. The Mass Airflow (MAF) is between 5-90 g/s.
  9. The fuel level is more than 10 percent.
  10. The Throttle Position (TP) is less than 90 percent.
  1. The average long term fuel trim cell value is above 23 percent.
  2. All of the above conditions are present for 6 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. The system will go lean if an injector is not supplying enough fuel.
  2. A lean condition could be present during high fuel demand.
  3. Using a scan tool, review the Failure Records. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 If conditions were not corrected, see appropriate BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES article.
  2. 6 If conditions were not corrected, a worn cam, worn intake or exhaust valves, or other engine mechanical failures may be at fault.

Scheme 169

Scheme 169: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 170

Scheme 170

DTC P0172: FUEL TRIM SYSTEM RICH - BANK 1 & DTC P0175: FUEL TRIM SYSTEM RICH - BANK 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the air/fuel metering system in order to provide the best possible combination of driveability, fuel economy and emission control. Fuel delivery is controlled differently during Open and Closed Loop. During Open Loop the PCM determines fuel delivery based on sensor signals, without oxygen sensor input. During Closed Loop, the oxygen sensor inputs are added and used by the PCM to calculate short and long term fuel trim, fuel delivery adjustments. If the oxygen sensors indicate a lean condition, fuel trim values will be above 0 percent. If the oxygen sensors indicate a rich condition, fuel trim values will be below 0 percent. Short term fuel trim values change rapidly in response to the Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) voltage signals. Long term fuel trim makes coarse adjustments in order to maintain an air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1. The fuel trim diagnostic will conduct a test to determine if a rich failure actually exists or if excessive vapor from the Evaporative (EVAP) emission canister is causing a rich condition. If the PCM detects an excessively rich condition, this Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0103, P0108, P0135, P0137, P0141, P0200, P0300, P0410, P0420, P0430, P0440, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0449, P0506, P0507 or P1441 are not set.
  2. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 167-239°F (75-115°C).
  3. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 4-194°F (-20 to 90°C).
  4. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) is between 26-90 kPa.
  5. The vehicle speed is less than 85 MPH.
  6. The engine speed is between 400-3000 RPM.
  7. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is more than 74 kPa.
  8. The mass airflow (MAF) is between 5-90 g/s.
  9. The fuel level is more than 10 percent.
  10. The Throttle Position (TP) is less than 90 percent.
  1. The average long term fuel trim value is above 23 percent.
  2. All of the above conditions are present for 6 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. The system will go lean if an injector is not supplying enough fuel.
  2. A lean condition could be present during high fuel demand.
  3. Using a scan tool, review the Failure Records. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 If conditions were not corrected, see appropriate BASIC DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES article.
  2. 6 If conditions were not corrected, a worn cam, worn intake or exhaust valves, or other engine mechanical failure may be the problem.

Scheme 171

Scheme 171: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 172

Scheme 172

DTC P0178: FUEL COMPOSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (5.3L FLEX-FUEL)

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Alcohol content and fuel temperature information is supplied to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) from the Fuel Composition Sensor (FCS). The FCS has an ignition 1 circuit, a signal circuit, and a ground circuit. The FCS uses a microprocessor inside the sensor to measure the ethanol percentage and fuel temperature, and changes output signals accordingly. The signal circuit carries both the ethanol percentage, and the fuel temperature within the same signal. The signal is both variable frequency and variable pulse width. The frequency signal indicated the ethanol percentage, and the pulse width indicates fuel temperature. The PCM provides an internal pull up to 5 volts on the signal circuit, and the FCS pulls the 5 volts to ground in pulses. The normal range of operating frequency is between 50-150 hertz. The normal pulse width ranges between 1-5 milliseconds. If the PCM detects a signal less than 45 hertz DTC P0178 will set.

  1. The engine run time is more than 30 seconds.
  2. The ignition voltage is more than 10.9 volts.

The FCS frequency is below 45 Hz for 12.5 seconds.

The hertz and millisecond parameters react immediately to any change in the FCS circuits, but may not react long enough to set this DTC.

A reading of 16 hertz in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records indicates a circuit failure.

An intermittent condition may not be detected because the sensor does not immediately power down and the connection may be restored before voltage drops below the operating threshold.

If this DTC will not reset and the parameters are steady, thoroughly inspect all FCS circuits for an intermittent open.

For an intermittent condition, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 173

Scheme 173: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 174

Scheme 174

DTC P0179: FUEL COMPOSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (5.3L FLEX-FUEL)

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Alcohol content and fuel temperature information is supplied to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) from the Fuel Composition Sensor (FCS). The FCS has an Ignition 1 circuit, a signal circuit and a ground circuit.

The FCS uses a microprocessor inside the sensor to measure the ethanol percentage and fuel temperature and changes output signals accordingly. The signal circuit carries both the ethanol percentage and the fuel temperature within the same signal. The signal is both variable frequency and variable pulse width. The frequency signal indicates the ethanol percentage and the pulse width indicates fuel temperature. The PCM provides an internal pull up to 5 volts on the signal circuit and the FCS pulls 5 volts to ground in pulses. The normal range of operating frequency is between 50 and 150 hertz. The normal pulse width ranges between 1 and 5 milliseconds. The microprocessor inside the sensor is capable of a certain amount of self-diagnosis. An output frequency of 170 hertz indicates that the fuel is contaminated or an internal sensor fault has been detected. If the PCM detects a signal more than 155 hertz, DTC P0179 will set.

  1. The engine run time is more than 30 seconds.
  2. The system voltage is more than 10.9 volts.

The FCS frequency is more than 155 Hz for 12.5 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.

Condition For Clearing MIL/DTC

  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

Scheme 175

Scheme 175: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0200: FUEL INJECTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The control module enables the appropriate fuel injector on the intake stroke for each cylinder. Ignition voltage is supplied to the fuel injectors. The control module controls each fuel injector by grounding the control circuit via a solid state device called a driver. The control module monitors the status of each driver. If the control module detects an incorrect voltage for the commanded state of the driver, a fuel injector control DTC sets.

  1. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  2. The ignition voltage is between 6-18 volts.
  1. The PCM detects an incorrect voltage on the fuel injector control circuit.
  2. The condition exists for 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Performing the Fuel Injector Coil test may help isolate an intermittent condition. See appropriate SYSTEM & COMPONENT TESTING article.
  2. For an intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step verifies that the PCM is able to control the fuel injector.
  2. 6 This step tests if a ground is constantly being applied to the fuel injector.

Scheme 176

Scheme 176: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 177

Scheme 177

DTC P0220: THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Position (TP) sensor 2 is a potentiometer type sensor with 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The TP sensor is used to determine the throttle plate angle for various engine management systems. The control module provides the TP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The TP sensor 1 signal voltage is low at closed throttle and increases as the throttle opens. When the control module detects that the TP sensor 2 signal or TP sensor 5-volt reference voltage is outside the predetermined range, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. The TP sensor 2 voltage is less than 0.28 volt or greater than 4.60 volts.
  2. The above condition is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode.
  4. Under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  5. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL/DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs or water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTC. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  3. For an intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 31 When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than one TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the may redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing one individual condition may correct more than one DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Keep this in mind when reviewing the stored information, Capture Info.

Scheme 178

Scheme 178: Diagnostic Procedures

Scheme 179

Scheme 179

Scheme 180

Scheme 180

Scheme 181

Scheme 181

DTC P0230: FUEL PUMP CONTROL RELAY CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The control module enables the fuel pump relay when the ignition switch is turned ON. The control module will disable the fuel pump relay within 2 seconds unless the control module detects ignition reference pulses. The control module continues to enable the fuel pump relay as long as ignition reference pulses are detected. The control module disables the fuel relay within 2 seconds if ignition reference pulses cease to be detected and the ignition remains ON.

The control module monitors the voltage on the fuel pump relay control circuit. If the control module detects an incorrect voltage on the fuel pump relay control circuit, a fuel pump relay control DTC sets.

  1. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  2. The ignition voltage is between 6-18 volts.
  1. The PCM detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match.
  2. The above conditions are present for a minimum of 2.5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Use a scan tool in order to clear the MIL and the DTC.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 This step verifies that the PCM is providing voltage to the fuel pump relay.
  2. 5 This step tests for an open in the ground circuit to the fuel pump relay.
  3. 6 This step determines if voltage is constantly being applied to the control circuit of the fuel pump relay.

Scheme 182

Scheme 182: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 183

Scheme 183

DTC P0300: ENGINE MISFIRE DETECTED

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses information from the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor and the camshaft position (CMP) sensor in order to determine when an engine misfire is occurring. By monitoring variations in the crankshaft rotation speed for each cylinder, the PCM is able to detect individual misfire events. A misfire rate that is high enough can cause three-way catalytic converter damage. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will flash ON and OFF when the conditions for catalytic converter damage are present. If the PCM detects a misfire rate sufficient to cause emission levels to exceed mandated standards, DTC P0300 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0128, P0220, P0315, P0335, P0336, P0341, P0343, P0502, P0503, P1114, P1115, P1120, or P1258 are not set.
  2. The engine speed is between 450-5000 RPM.
  3. The ignition voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 19-266°F (-7-130°C).
  5. The fuel level is more than 10 percent.
  6. The Throttle Position (TP) sensor angle is steady within 1 percent.
  7. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) and the traction control system are not active.
  8. The transmission is not changing gears.
  9. The A/C clutch is not changing states.
  10. The PCM is not in fuel shut-off or decel fuel cut-off (DFCO) mode.
  11. The PCM is not receiving a rough road signal.

The PCM is detecting a crankshaft rotation speed variation indicating a misfire sufficient to cause emission levels to exceed mandated standards.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Excessive vibration from sources other than the engine can cause a misfire DTC. The following are possible sources of vibration: Variable thickness brake rotor. Drive shaft not balanced. Certain rough road conditions.
  2. There may be more or less cylinders actually misfiring than indicated by the scan tool.
  3. Spray water on the secondary ignition components using a spray bottle. Look and listen for arcing or misfiring.
  4. Observe, if more then one cylinder is misfiring, the scan tool may only display one cylinder misfiring. This will not be apparent until the repair is completed. Also, if an ignition coil ground circuit is open for one side of the engine, the scan tool may only display 2 or 3 cylinders misfiring. Inspect the ground circuit for the ignition coil on the cylinder bank of the engine that has more then one cylinder misfiring.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the CKP variations are not within the learned values, the misfire counters may increment.

Scheme 184

Scheme 184: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 185

Scheme 185

Scheme 186

Scheme 186

DTC P0315: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR VARIATION NOT LEARNED

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Crankshaft Position Sensor (CKP) system variation learn feature is used to calculate reference period errors caused by slight tolerance variations in the crankshaft and the CKP sensor. The calculated error allows the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to detect misfire events over a wide range of engine speed and load. If the CKP system variation values are not stored in the PCM memory, DTC P0315 sets.

DTCs P0335, P0336, P0341, P0342, or P0343 are not set.

The CKP system variation values are not stored in the PCM memory.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. the control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records.
  1. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The CKP system variation values are not stored in the PCM memory after a learn procedure has been performed. If the actual CKP variation is not within the CKP system variation compensating values stored in the PCM, DTC P0300 may set.

The CKP system variation learn procedure is also required when the following service procedures have been performed, regardless of whether DTC P0315 is set.

  1. An engine replacement.
  2. A PCM replacement.
  3. A harmonic balancer replacement.
  4. A crankshaft replacement.
  5. Any engine repairs which disturb the CKP sensor relationship.

If the CKP system variation learn procedure cannot be performed successfully, check for the following conditions and correct as necessary

  1. A damaged reluctor wheel.
  2. Excessive crankshaft runout.
  3. A damaged crankshaft.
  4. Interference in the signal circuit of the CKP sensor.
  5. A coolant temperature that is not within the Conditions For Running DTC.
  6. The ignition switch is in the ON position until the battery is drained.
  7. A PCM power disconnect with the ignition ON may erase the stored value and set the DTC P0315.

Scheme 187

Scheme 187: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0325: KNOCK SENSOR MODULE CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The knock sensors (KS) produce an AC signal under all engine operating conditions. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) calculates the average voltage range of each KS signal. If the KS system is operating normally, the PCM should monitor the KS voltage varying above and below a calculated average voltage. This DTC will set if the PCM malfunctions in a manner that will not allow proper diagnosis of the KS system.

  1. The engine run time is more than 10 seconds.
  2. The ignition voltage is more than 10 volts.
  1. A malfunction with the KS system within the PCM are faulty.
  2. All of the above conditions are present for 12 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

Scheme 188

Scheme 188: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0327: KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - SENSOR 1 & DTC P0332: KNOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT - LOW VOLTAGE - SENSOR 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Knock Sensor (KS) system enables the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) to control the ignition timing for the best possible performance while protecting the engine from potentially damaging levels of detonation. The system uses 2 KS located under the intake manifold. KS 1 is located at the front of the engine. KS 2 is located at the back of the engine. Each KS produces and AC voltage that varies depending on the vibration level during engine operation. The PCM adjusts the spark timing based on the amplitude and frequency of the KS signal. The PCM used each KS signal to calculated an average voltage range value. If the KS system is operating normally, the PCM should monitor the KS voltage varying above and below the voltage range. If the PCM detects the KS signal voltage within the voltage range, or the KS signal is not present, a DTC will set. DTC P0327 refers to the front KS. DTC P0332 refers to the rear KS.

  1. DTCs P0117, P0118, or P0125 are not set.
  2. The minimum noise level must be learned. The minimum noise level is learned when the following conditions are met: The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) must be greater than 140°F (60°C). The engine RPM is between 475-975 for 10 seconds.
  3. The engine speed is between 1500-3000 RPM.
  4. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) is less than 49 kPa.
  5. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is more than 140°F (60°C).
  6. The throttle angle is more than 0 percent.
  7. The engine run time is more than 10 seconds.
  8. The ignition voltage is more than 10 volts.
  1. The PCM detects that the KS signal is within the calculated voltage range or the KS signal is not present.
  2. The above conditions are met for more than 9 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. If DTCs P0327 and P0332 are set at the same time, inspect for poor connections at the KS harness jumper, located at the left rear side of the intake manifold.
  2. Inspect the KS for physical damage. A KS that is dropped may cause a DTC to set.
  3. Inspect the KS for proper installation. A KS that is loose or over torqued may cause a DTC to set. The KS should be free of thread sealant. The KS mounting surface should be free of burrs, casting flash, and foreign material.
  4. For an intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step ensures the malfunction is present.
  2. 3 This step tests the KS and the KS jumper harness for an open or a short to ground.
  3. 4 Tapping on the engine block will simulate an engine knock.

Scheme 189

Scheme 189: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 190

Scheme 190

DTC P0335: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor signal indicates the crankshaft speed and position. The CKP sensor is connected directly to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), and consists of the following circuits

  1. The 12-volt reference circuit.
  2. The low reference circuit.
  3. The CKP sensor signal circuit.

If the PCM detects there is no signal from the CKP sensor for 8 seconds, DTC P0335 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0341, P0342, or P0343 are not set.
  2. The camshaft position (CMP) sensor signal is incrementing.
  3. The Mass Air Flow (MAF) is more than 3 g/s.
  4. The ignition switch is in the Crank position.

The PCM determines there is no signal from the CKP sensor for less than 8 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The following conditions may cause this DTC to set

  1. Excessive air gap between the CKP sensor and the reluctor wheel.
  2. Crankshaft reluctor wheel damage or improper installation.
  3. The CKP sensor coming in contact with the reluctor wheel.
  4. Foreign material passing between the CKP sensor and the reluctor wheel.
  5. Insufficient fuel.

Excess crankshaft end play causes the CKP sensor reluctor wheel to move out of alignment with the CKP sensor. This could result in any one of the following

  1. A no-start.
  2. A start and stall.
  3. Erratic performance.

For an intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step determines if the fault is present.
  2. 6 This step simulates a CKP sensor signal to the PCM. If the PCM receives the signal, the fuel pump will operate for about 2 seconds.

Scheme 191

Scheme 191: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 192

Scheme 192

DTC P0336: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The crankshaft position (CKP) sensor signal indicates the crankshaft speed and position. The CKP sensor is connected directly to the Powertrain Control Module (PCM), and consists of the following circuits

  1. The 12-volt reference circuit.
  2. The low reference circuit.
  3. The CKP sensor signal circuit.

If the PCM detects that the CKP sensor signal is inconsistent for 2 seconds, DTC P0336 sets.

The engine is cranking or running.

The PCM determines that the CKP sensor signal is out of range for less than 2 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The following problems may cause this DTC to set

  1. Crankshaft reluctor wheel damage or improper installation.
  2. The CKP sensor coming in contact with the reluctor wheel.
  3. The engine running out of fuel.
  4. If the crankshaft rotates backwards, this DTC sets. This condition is only with vehicles equipped with a manual transmission. This condition can occur when a vehicle is on an incline and the clutch is released and an engine stall occurs.

Excess crankshaft end play will cause the CKP sensor reluctor wheel to move out of alignment with the CKP sensor. This could result in any one of the following conditions

  1. A no-start.
  2. A start and stall.
  3. Erratic performance.

For an intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step verifies that the malfunction is present.
  2. 3 This step inspects for electromagnetic interference (EMI) on the CKP sensor circuits.

Scheme 193

Scheme 193: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0341: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT PERFORMANCE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The camshaft position (CMP) sensor works in conjunction with a 1 X reluctor wheel on the camshaft. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides a 12-volt reference to the CMP sensor as well as a low reference and a signal circuit.

As the camshaft rotates, the reluctor wheel interrupts a magnetic field produced by a magnet within the sensor. The sensors internal circuitry detects this and produces a signal which the PCM reads.

The PCM uses this 1 X signal is used by the PCM to determine if the cylinder is at Top Dead Center (TDC) is on the firing stroke or the exhaust stroke. The PCM can determine TDC for all cylinders by using the CKP sensor 24 X signal alone. The engine will start without a CMP signal as long as the PCM receives the CKP sensor 24 X signal. A slightly longer cranking time may be a symptom of this condition. The system attempts synchronization and looks for an increase in engine speed indicating that the engine started. If the PCM does not detect an increase in engine speed, the PCM assumes that the PCM incorrectly synchronized to the exhaust stroke and re-syncs to the opposite cam position. If the PCM detects that a CMP to CKP mis-match has occurred DTC P0341 sets.

The engine speed is less than 4,000 RPM.

The PCM detects that a CMP to CKP mis-match has occurred.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The following conditions may cause this DTC to set

  1. Camshaft reluctor wheel damage.
  2. Sensor contact with the reluctor wheel.
  3. Foreign material passing between the sensor and the reluctor wheel.
  4. Excessive camshaft end-play.
  5. Wiring routed too close to secondary ignition components.

If you find any damage to the reluctor wheel or to the camshaft, see appropriate article in ENGINES.

If the condition is intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step inspects for electromagnetic interference (EMI) on the CMP sensor circuits.
  2. 6 Damage to the face of the sensor could indicate foreign material passing between the CMP sensor and the reluctor wheel. This condition would cause this DTC to set. Damage to the reluctor wheel would affect the CMP sensor output.

Scheme 194

Scheme 194: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0342: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - SIGNAL LOW

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The camshaft position (CMP) sensor works in conjunction with a 1 X reluctor wheel on the camshaft. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides a 12 volt reference to the CMP sensor as well as a low reference and a signal circuit.

As the camshaft rotates, the reluctor wheel interrupts a magnetic field produced by a magnet within the sensor. The sensors internal circuitry detects this and produces a signal which the PCM reads.

The CMP sensor 1 X signal is used by the PCM to determine if the cylinder at Top Dead Center (TDC) is on the firing stroke or the exhaust stroke. The PCM can determine TDC for all cylinders by using the CKP sensor 24 X signal alone. The engine will start without a CMP signal as long as the PCM receives the CKP sensor 24 X signal. A slightly longer cranking time may be a symptom of this condition. The system attempts synchronization and looks for an increase in engine speed indicating that the engine started. If the PCM does not detect an increase in engine speed, the PCM assumes that the PCM incorrectly synchronized to the exhaust stroke and re-syncs to the opposite cam position. If the PCM detects that a CMP signal is constantly low, DTC P0342 sets.

The engine speed is less than 4000 RPM.

The PCM detects the cam signal is stuck low for 1.5 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The following conditions may cause this DTC to set

  1. Camshaft reluctor ring damage.
  2. The sensor coming in contact with the reluctor ring.
  3. Foreign material passing between the sensor and the reluctor ring.
  4. Excessive camshaft end-play.
  5. Wiring routed too close to secondary ignition components.

If the condition is intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step tests the CMP sensor signal circuit. Applying a voltage causes the CMP sensor high to low and low to high parameter to increase if the circuit and the PCM are operating properly.

Scheme 195

Scheme 195: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 196

Scheme 196

DTC P0343: CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR - SIGNAL HIGH

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The camshaft position (CMP) sensor works in conjunction with a 1 X reluctor wheel on the camshaft. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides a 12-volt reference to the CMP sensor as well as a low reference and a signal circuit.

The CMP sensor determines whether a cylinder is on a firing stroke or on an exhaust stroke. As the camshaft rotates, the reluctor wheel interrupts a magnetic field produced by a magnet within the sensor. The sensors internal circuitry detects this and produces a signal which the PCM reads.

The CMP sensor 1 X signal is used by the PCM to determine if the cylinder at Top Dead Center (TDC) is on the firing stroke or the exhaust stroke. The PCM can determine TDC for all cylinders by using the CKP sensor 24 X signal. A slightly longer cranking time may be a symptom of this condition. The system attempts synchronization and looks for an increase in engine speed indicating that the engine started. If the PCM does not detect an increase in engine speed, the PCM assumes that the PCM incorrectly synchronized to the exhaust stroke and re-syncs to the opposite cam position. If the PCM detects that the CMP signal is constantly high, DTC P0343 sets.

The engine speed is less than 4000 RPM.

The PCM detects the CAM signal is high for 1.5 seconds.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The following conditions may cause this DTC to set

  1. Camshaft reluctor ring damage.
  2. The sensor coming in contact with the reluctor ring.
  3. Foreign material passing between the sensor and the reluctor ring.
  4. Excessive camshaft end-play.
  5. Wiring routed too close to secondary ignition components.

If the condition is intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step tests the CMP sensor signal circuit. Applying a voltage causes the CMP sensor high to low and low to high parameter to increase if the circuit and the PCM are operating properly.

Scheme 197

Scheme 197: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 198

Scheme 198

DTC P0351-P0358: IGNITION CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The ignition system on this engine uses an individual ignition coil for each cylinder. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) controls the ignition system operation. The PCM controls each coil using one of 8 Ignition Control (IC) circuits. The PCM commands the IC circuit low when a spark event is requested. This causes the IC module to energize the ignition coil to create a spark at the spark plug. Each ignition coil has the following circuits

  1. The Ignition Control (IC) circuit.
  2. The ignition 1 voltage circuit.
  3. A ground circuit.
  4. A reference low circuit.

The sequencing and timing are PCM controlled. This DTC sets when the IC circuit is out of range.

The engine is operating.

The PCM detects the IC circuit is grounded, open, or shorted to voltage for less than 1 second.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step verifies the integrity of the IC circuit and the PCM output.
  2. 4 This step tests for a short to ground on the IC circuit.

Scheme 199

Scheme 199: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 200

Scheme 200

DTC P0420: TWC SYSTEM - LOW EFFICIENCY - BANK 1 & DTC P0430: TWC SYSTEM - LOW EFFICIENCY - BANK 2

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

In order to maintain a reasonably low emissions of Hydrocarbons (HC), Carbon Monoxide (CO), and Oxides Of Nitrogen (NOx), the engine controls system uses a three-way catalytic converter. The catalyst within the converter promotes a chemical reaction which oxidizes the HC and CO present in the exhaust gas. This reaction converts them into harmless water vapor and carbon dioxide. The catalyst also reduces NOx by converting the NOx to nitrogen. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) monitors this process using Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) bank 1 sensor 2. HO2S bank 1 sensor 2, located in the exhaust stream past the three-way catalytic converter, produces an output signal which indicates the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. This determines the catalyst's ability to convert exhaust emissions effectively. If the catalyst is functioning correctly, the HO2S bank 1 HO2S 2 signal will be far less active than that produced by HO2S bank 1 sensor 1. This indicates that the three-way catalytic converters oxygen storage capacity is operating at a threshold considered acceptable. The PCM performs this diagnostic test at idle. When the conditions for running this DTC are met, the following occurs

  1. The PCM captures the current rear HO2S rich-to-lean status.
  2. The air/fuel ratio transitions from rich to lean or lean to rich depending on the capture rear HO2S rich to lean status.
  3. The air/fuel ratio transitions a second time opposite the first air/fuel ratio transition.
  4. The PCM captures the response time, the time the HO2S goes from below 300 mV to above 600 mV and from 600 mV to below 300 mV, of the front and rear HO2S when the air/fuel ratio transitions occur. The HO2S response time goes from less than 300 mV to more than 600 mV, and from more than 600 mV to less than 300 mV.
  5. The PCM measures the time necessary for the rear HO2S voltage to cross a reference rich-to-lean threshold, minus the time necessary for the front HO2S voltage to cross the same rich-to-lean threshold. The difference between the front HO2S time and the rear HO2S time is the oxygen storage capacity of the catalyst. This DTC sets if the time exceeds a predetermined threshold.
  1. DTCs P0101-P0103, P0106-P0108, P0112, P0113, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0125, P0128, P0131-P0135, P0137, P0138, P0140, P0141, P0151-P0155, P0157, P0158, P0160, P0161, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0177, P0178, P0179, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0325, P0327, P0332, P0335, P0336, P0341-P0343, P0351-P0358, P0442, P0443, P0446, P0452, P0453, P455, P0496, P0502, P0503, P1125, P1133, P1153, P1258, P1514, P1516, P1518, P2108 or P2135 are not set.
  2. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is 5-185°F (-15-85°C).
  3. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is more than 74 kPa.
  4. The engine is operating.
  5. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is 158-248°F (70-120°C).
  6. Since the end of the last idle period, the engine speed is more than 900 RPM for one of the following amounts of time: 45 seconds for manual transmissions. 40 seconds for automatic transmissions.
  7. The Closed Loop fuel control is enabled.

The PCM determines the oxygen storage capability of the catalytic converter has degraded below a calibrated threshold.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) the first time the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module will set the DTC and records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores the failure information in the scan tools Freeze Frame/Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step inspects for conditions that can cause the 3-way catalytic converter efficiency to appear degraded.
  2. 5 A catalytic converter which has been discolored may be due to an engine running rich, lean or had a previous sever misfire. Verifying the fuel trim percentages may be of assistance in determining if such a condition exists.

Scheme 201

Scheme 201: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0442: EVAP SYSTEM - SMALL LEAK

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

This diagnostic tests the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system for a small leak when the key is turned OFF and the correct conditions are met.

Heat is transferred into a vehicle fuel tank while the vehicle is operating. When the vehicle is turned OFF, a change in the fuel tank vapor temperature occurs, which may result in corresponding pressure changes in the fuel vapor space. This change is monitored by the control module using the fuel tank pressure sensor input. The control module then makes a judgement on the integrity of the system. With a 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) leak in the system, the amount of pressure change observed is significantly less than that of a sealed system.

  1. DTCs P0100, P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0335, P0336, P0443, P0446, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P0500, P0502, P1106, P1107, or P1683 are not set.
  2. The diagnostic runs once with a 10 hour minimum between tests after a fail.
  3. DTC P0455 must run and pass.
  4. The start up intake air temperature (IAT) is between 39-86° F (4-30° C).
  5. The start up Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is less than 86° F (30° C).
  6. The start up IAT and ECT are within 15° F (8° C).
  7. The Barometric Pressure (BARO) is more than 75 kPa.
  8. The ambient air temperature is between 36-90° F (2-32° C).
  9. The engine run time minimum is 600 seconds.
  10. The odometer displays more than 10 miles.
  11. The vehicle has traveled more than 3 miles this trip.
  12. The ECT is more than 158° F (70° C).
  13. The fuel level is between 15-85 percent.
  14. The ignition is OFF.

The control module detects a pressure change that is less than a calibrated amount.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame/Failure Records.
  1. The PCM will turn the MIL OFF during the first consecutive trip in which the diagnostic has been run and passed.
  2. A last test failed (current DTC) clears when the PCM turns OFF the MIL.
  3. The history DTC will clear after the PCM runs and passes 40 consecutive warm up cycles with no failure.
  4. The DTC can be cleared by using a scan tool.
  1. To help locate intermittent leaks, use the J 41413-200 Evaporative Emissions System Tester (EEST) to introduce smoke into the EVAP system. Move all EVAP components while observing smoke with the J 41413-SPT High Intensity White Light.
  2. To improve visibility of the smoke exiting the EVAP system, observe the suspected leak area from different angles with the J 41413-SPT.
  3. If the condition is intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 Introducing smoke in 15 second intervals may allow smaller leak areas to be more noticeable. When the system is less pressurized, the smoke will sometimes escape in a more condensed manner.
  2. 5 This step verifies that repairs are complete and that no other condition is present.

Scheme 202

Scheme 202: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 203

Scheme 203

DTC P0443: EVAP PURGE SOLENOID CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

An ignition voltage is supplied directly to the Evaporative (EVAP) emission canister purge valve. The EVAP canister purge valve is pulse width modulated (PWM). The scan tool displays the amount of ON time as a percentage. The control module monitors the status of the driver. The control module controls the EVAP canister purge valve ON time by grounding the control circuit via an internal switch called a driver. If the control module detects an incorrect voltage for the commanded state of the driver, this DTC sets.

  1. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  2. The system voltage is between 6-18 volts.
  1. The control module detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match.
  2. The above conditions are present for a minimum of 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step tests if the concern is active. The EVAP purge valve is PWM. You should hear a clicking sound when the purge valve is commanded to 50 percent. The clicking sound should stop when the EVAP purge valve is commanded to 0 percent. The rate at which the valve cycles should increase when the commanded state is increased, and decrease when the commanded state is decreased. Repeat the commands as necessary.
  2. 5 This step verifies that the control module is providing ground to the EVAP purge valve.
  3. 6 This step tests if a ground is constantly being applied to the EVAP purge valve.

Scheme 204

Scheme 204: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0446: EVAP VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

This DTC tests the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system for a restricted or blocked EVAP vent path. The control module commands the EVAP canister purge solenoid ON and the EVAP canister vent solenoid ON. This allows vacuum to be applied to the EVAP system. Once a calibrated vacuum level has been reached, the control module commands the EVAP canister purge solenoid OFF and the EVAP canister vent solenoid OFF. The control module monitors the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor for a decrease in vacuum. If the vacuum does not decrease to near zero inches H2O in a calibrated time, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0125, P0131, P0132, P0133, P0134, P0135, P0137, P0138, P0140, P0141, P0147, P0151, P0152, P0153, P0154, P0155, P0157, P0158, P0160, P0161, P0167, P0220, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0502, P0503, P1111, P1112, P1114, P1115, or P1120 are not set.
  2. The ignition voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  3. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is more than 75 kPa.
  4. The fuel level is between 15-85 percent.
  5. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 39-86°F (4-30°C).
  6. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 39-86°F (4-30°C).
  7. The start up ECT and IAT are within 16°F (9°C) of each other.
  1. The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) is less than -10 in. H2O.
  2. The condition is present for more than 30 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

An intermittent Condition could be caused by a damaged EVAP vent housing, a temporary blockage at the EVAP vent valve inlet, or a pinched vent hose. A blockage in the vent system will also cause a poor fuel fill problem. If the condition is intermittent, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This test determines if the failure is present or intermittent.

Scheme 205

Scheme 205: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 206

Scheme 206

DTC P0449: EVAP VENT SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

An ignition voltage is supplied to the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) canister vent valve. The control module grounds the EVAP canister vent valve control circuit to close the valve be means of an internal switch called a driver. The scan tool displays the commended state of the EVAP canister vent valve as ON or OFF. The control module monitors the status of the driver. If the control module detects an incorrect voltage for the commanded state of the driver, this DTC sets.

  1. The engine speed is more than 400 RPM.
  2. The system voltage is between 6-18 volts.
  1. The control module detects that the commanded state of the driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match.
  2. The above conditions are present for a minimum of 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 A click should be heard or felt when the valve operates. Ensure that both the ON and the OFF states are commanded. Repeat the commands as necessary.
  2. 5 This step verifies that the control module is providing ground to the EVAP vent valve.
  3. 6 This step tests if the EVAP vent valve control circuit is grounded.

Scheme 207

Scheme 207: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 208

Scheme 208

DTC P0452: FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR - LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor measures the difference between the air pressure or vacuum in the evaporative emission (EVAP) system, and the outside pressure. The control module supplies a 5-volt reference and a low reference circuit to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor signal circuit voltage varies depending on EVAP system pressure or vacuum. If the FTP sensor signal voltage goes below a calibrated value, this DTC sets.

If FTP sensor signal voltage is 1.5 volts or more the FTP has negative pressure/vacuum. If the FTP sensor signal voltage is 1.5 volts or less the FTP has positive pressure.

The engine is running.

  1. The fuel tank pressure sensor voltage is less than 0.1 volt.
  2. All conditions are present for greater than 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 This step tests for the proper operation of the circuit in the high voltage range.
  2. 6 The 5-volt reference circuit for the FTP sensor is routed through connector C152. This area may provide a good test point for diagnosing concerns with this circuit.
  3. 7 The FTP sensor signal circuit is routed through connector C152. This area may provide a good test point for diagnosing concerns with this circuit.

Scheme 209

Scheme 209: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 210

Scheme 210

DTC P0453: FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR - HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Fuel Tank Pressure measures the difference between the air pressure or vacuum in the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system, and the outside air pressure. The control module supplies a 5-volt reference and a low reference circuit to the FTP sensor. The FTP sensor signal circuit voltage varies depending on EVAP system pressure or vacuum. If the FTP sensor signal voltage increases above a calibrated value, this DTC sets.

If FTP sensor signal voltage is 1.5 volts or more the FTP has negative pressure/vacuum. If the FTP sensor signal voltage is 1.5 volts or less the FTP has positive pressure.

The engine is running.

  1. The fuel tank pressure sensor voltage is more than 4.9 volts.
  2. All conditions are present for greater than 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If DTC P1639 set, the 5-volt reference circuit maybe shorted to a voltage.

Scheme 211

Scheme 211: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 212

Scheme 212

DTC P0455: EVAP SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED - GROSS LEAK/NO FLOW

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The control module tests the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system for a large leak. The control module monitors the fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor signal to determine the EVAP system vacuum level. When the conditions for running are met, the control module commands the EVAP canister purge valve OPEN and the EVAP vent valve CLOSED. This allows engine vacuum to enter the EVAP system. At a calibrated time, or vacuum level, the control module commands the EVAP canister purge valve closed, sealing the system, and monitors the FTP sensor input in order to determine the EVAP system vacuum level. If the system is unable to achieve the calibrated vacuum level, or the vacuum level decreases too rapidly, this DTC sets.

  1. DTC P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0125, P0131, P0132, P0133, P0134, P0135, P0137, P0138, P0140, P0141, P0147, P0151, P0152, P0153, P0154, P0155, P0157, P0158, P0140, P0161, P0167, P0220, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0502, P0503, P1111, P1112, P1114, P1115, or P1120 are not set.
  2. The engine is running.
  3. The ignition voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  4. The Barometric Pressure (BARO) is more than 75 kPa.
  5. The fuel level is between 15-85 percent.
  6. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 39-149° F (4-65° C).
  7. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 39-167° F (4-75° C).
  8. The start-up ECT and IAT are within 16° F (9° C) of each other.

The EVAP system is not able to achieve or maintain vacuum during the diagnostic test.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The fires time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. To help locate intermittent leaks, use the J 41413-200 Evaporative Emissions System Tester (EEST) to introduce smoke into the EVAP system. Move all EVAP components while observing smoke with the J 41413-SPT High Intensity White Light. Introducing smoke in 15 second intervals will allow less pressure into the EVAP system. When the system is less pressurized, the smoke will sometimes escape in a more condensed manner.
  2. A temporary blockage in the EVAP purge solenoid purge pipe or EVAP canister could cause an intermittent condition. Inspect and repair intermittent condition. Inspect and repair any restriction in the EVAP system.
  3. To improve visibility of the smoke exiting the EVAP system, observe the suspected leak area from different angles with the J 41413-SPT.
  4. Reviewing the Failure Records vehicle mileage since the diagnostic test last failed may help determine how often the condition that caused the DTC to be set occurs. This may assist in diagnosing the condition.
  5. If the condition is intermittent, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 Introducing smoke in 15 second intervals may allow smaller leak areas to be more noticeable. When the system is less pressurized, the smoke will sometimes escape in a more condensed manner.
  2. 5 This step verifies proper operation of the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor.
  3. 6 A normal operating FTP sensor should increase above 5 inches of H2O and stop between 6 and 7 inches of H2O.

Scheme 213

Scheme 213: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 214

Scheme 214

Scheme 215

Scheme 215

DTC P0496: EVAP SYSTEM HIGH PURGE FLOW

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

This DTC tests for undesired intake manifold vacuum flow to the Evaporative Emission (EVAP) system. The control module seals the EVAP system by commanding the EVAP canister purge valve OFF and the EVAP canister vent valve ON. The control module monitors the Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor to determine if a vacuum is being drawn on the EVAP system. If vacuum in the EVAP system is more than a predetermined time, this DTC sets.

If the control module command is ON the EVAP purge valve is OPEN and the EVAP canister vent valve is CLOSED. If the control module command is OFF the EVAP purge valve is CLOSED and the EVAP canister vent valve is OPEN.

  1. DTC P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0121, P0122, P0123, P0125, P0131, P0132, P0133, P0134, P0135, P0137, P0138, P0140, P0141, P0147, P0151, P0152, P0153, P0154, P0155, P0157, P0158, P0160, P0161, P0167, P0220, P0442, P0443, P0449, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0502, P0503, P1111, P1112, P1114, P1115, P1120 are not set.
  2. The ignition voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  3. The Barometric Pressure (BARO) is more than 75 kPa.
  4. The fuel level is between 15-85 percent.
  5. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is between 39-86° F (4-30° C).
  6. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is between 39-86° F (4-30° C).
  7. The start-up ECT and IAT are within 16° F (9° C) of each other.
  1. A continuous open purge flow condition is detected during the diagnostic test.
  2. The fuel tank pressure decreases to less than -11 inches H2O.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

Scheme 216

Scheme 216: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0506: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM - LOW RPM

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) system uses various inputs from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). This system uses the inputs in order to control the idle speed through serial data circuits to the TAC module. The DC motor, which is located in the throttle body, activates the throttle plate. In order to decrease idle speed, the TAC module commands the throttle closed reducing air flow into the engine and the idle speed decreases. In order to increase the idle speed, the TAC module commands the throttle plate open allowing more air flow. If the actual idle RPM does not match the desired idle RPM within a calibrated time, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P0101-P0103, P0106-P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116-P0118, P0120, P0125, P0128, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0443, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P0500, P0502, P0503, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine is running for greater than 60 seconds.
  3. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is greater than 140°F (60°C).
  4. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is greater than 14°F (-10°C).
  5. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is greater than 65 kPa.
  6. The system voltage is between 9-18 volts.
  7. The vehicle speed is less than 1 MPH.
  8. The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor is at zero percent.
  1. The actual idle speed is 100 RPM less than the desired idle speed.
  2. All of the above conditions are present for 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This test determines if the engine can achieve the commanded RPM.

Scheme 217

Scheme 217: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0507: IDLE CONTROL SYSTEM - HIGH RPM

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The throttle actuator control (TAC) system uses various inputs from the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). This system uses these inputs in order to control the idle speed through serial data circuits to the TAC module. The DC motor, which is located in the throttle body, activates the throttle plate. In order to decrease the idle speed, the TAC module commands the throttle closed reducing air flow into the engine and the idle speed decreases. In order to increase the idle speed, the TAC module commands the throttle plate open, allowing more air flow. If the actual idle RPM does not match the desired idle RPM within a calibrated time, this DTC will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0117, P0118, P0125, P0171, P0172, P0174, P0175, P0200, P0300, P0440, P0442, P0443, P0500, P0502, P0503, P1120, P1220, P1221, or P1441 are not set.
  2. The engine is running for greater than 60 seconds.
  3. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) is greater than 140°F (60°C).
  4. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) is greater than 14°F (-10°C).
  5. The Barometric (BARO) pressure is greater than 65 kPa.
  6. The system voltage is between 9-18 volts.
  7. The vehicle speed is less than 1 MPH.
  8. The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor is at 0 percent.
  1. The actual idle speed is 200 RPM greater than the desired idle speed.
  2. All of the above conditions present for 5 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This test determines if the engine can achieve the commanded RPM.

Scheme 218

Scheme 218: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0601-P0607, P1600, P1621, P1627, P1680, P1681, P1683 & P2610: PCM MEMORY

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

This diagnostic applies to internal microprocessor integrity conditions within the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). This diagnostic also addresses if the PCM is not programmed.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 A DTC P0602 indicates the PCM is not programmed.

Scheme 219

Scheme 219: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P0641: 5-VOLT REFERENCE CIRCUIT OUT OF RANGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides 5 volts to the following sensors

  1. The Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) sensor.
  2. The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor.

These 5-volt reference circuits are independent of each other outside the PCM, but are bussed together inside the PCM. Therefore a circuit condition on one sensor 5-volt reference circuit may affect the other sensor 5-volt reference circuits. The PCM monitors the voltage on the 5-volt reference circuit. If the PCM detects that the voltage is out of tolerance, DTC P0641 sets.

The engine is running.

  1. The PCM detects a voltage out of tolerance condition on the 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. The above condition is present for longer than 2 seconds.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating condition to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 9 A short to voltage on the signal circuit of the Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor will backfeed through the sensor into the 5-volt reference circuit and set this DTC.

Scheme 220

Scheme 220: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 221

Scheme 221

DTC P0650: MIL CONTROL CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) is located on the instrument panel cluster (IPC). The MIL informs the driver than an emission system fault has occurred and that the engine control system requires service. The control module monitors the MIL control circuit for conditions that are incorrect for the commanded start of the MIL. For example, a failure condition exists if the control module detects low voltage when the MIL is commanded OFF, or high voltage when the MIL is commanded ON. If the control module detects an improper voltage on the MIL control circuit, DTC P0650 will set.

The engine is running.

  1. The control module detects that the commanded start of the MIL driver and the actual state of the control circuit do not match.
  2. The conditions are present for a minimum of 30 seconds.

The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.

  1. A last test failed, or current DTC, clears when the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Use a scan tool in order to clear the DTC.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 This step tests for a short to ground in the MIL control circuit. With the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) disconnected and the ignition ON, the MIL should be OFF.
  2. 5 This step tests for a short to voltage on the MIL control circuit. With the fuse removed, there should be no voltage on the MIL control circuit.

Scheme 222

Scheme 222: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 223

Scheme 223

DTC P0651: SENSOR REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) provides 5 volts to the following sensors

  1. The Air Conditioning (A/C) pressure sensor.
  2. The Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) sensor, if equipped.

These 5-volt reference circuits are independent of each other outside the PCM, but are bussed together inside the PCM. Therefore a circuit condition on one sensor 5-volt reference circuit may affect the other sensor 5-volt reference circuits. If the PCM detects that the voltage is out of tolerance, DTC P0651 sets.

  1. The PCM detects a voltage out of tolerance condition on the 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. The above condition is present for longer than 2 seconds.

Action Take When DTC Sets

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating condition s at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malefaction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

Scheme 224

Scheme 224: Diagnostic Procedures

Scheme 225

Scheme 225

DTC P1106: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits

  1. 5-volt circuit.
  2. Low reference circuit.
  3. MAP sensor signal circuit.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The PCM also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The PCM should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The PCM should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the Barometric Pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is intermittently high, DTC P1106 sets.

  1. DTC P0120, P0220, P1125, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, P2120, P2121, P2125, P2126, P2130, P2131, P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine is running.
  3. The throttle angle is less than 1 percent when the engine speed is less than 1200 RPM.
  4. The throttle angle is less than 20 percent when the engine speed is more than 1200 RPM.

The PCM detects that the MAP sensor voltage is more than 4.9 volts for more than 6 seconds.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.

Conditions For Clearing DTC

  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step attempts to pinpoint the location of the intermittent fault.

Scheme 226

Scheme 226: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1107: MAP SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) sensor responds to pressure changes in the intake manifold. The pressure changes occur based on the engine load. The MAP sensor has the following circuits

  1. 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. Low reference circuit.
  3. MAP sensor signal circuit.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the MAP sensor on the 5-volt reference circuit. The PCM also provides a ground on the low reference circuit. The MAP sensor provides a signal to the PCM on the MAP sensor signal circuit which is relative to the pressure changes in the manifold. The PCM should detect a low signal voltage at a low MAP, such as during an idle or a deceleration. The PCM should detect a high signal voltage at a high MAP, such as the ignition is ON, with the engine OFF, or at a Wide Open Throttle (WOT). The MAP sensor is also used in order to determine the Barometric Pressure (BARO). This occurs when the ignition switch is turned ON, with the engine OFF. The BARO reading may also be updated whenever the engine is operated at WOT. The PCM monitors the MAP sensor signal for voltage outside of the normal range. If the PCM detects a MAP sensor signal voltage that is intermittently low, DTC P1107 sets.

  1. DTC P0120, P0220, P1125, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, P2120, P2121, P2125, P2126, P2130, P2131, P2135 are not set.
  2. The engine is running.
  3. The throttle angle is 0 percent when the engine speed is less than 800 RPM.
  4. The throttle angle is more than 12.5 percent when engine speed is more than 800 RPM.

The PCM detects that the MAP sensor voltage is less than 0.1 volt for more than 6 seconds.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control nodule records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 3 This step attempts to pinpoint the location of the intermittent t fault.

Scheme 227

Scheme 227: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1111: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor. The IAT sensor has a signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The IAT sensor measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the IAT signal circuit. When the IAT sensor is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the air temperature increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the IAT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an intermittent high IAT signal voltage, indicating a low temperature, DTC P1111 sets.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, or P0113 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 120 seconds.
  3. The engine coolant temperature is more than 140°F (60°C).
  4. The vehicle speed is less than 7 MPH.
  5. The mass air flow is less than 15 g/s.

The intake air temperature is less than -36°F (-38°C) for more than 1 second for a calibrated amount of time.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. An IAT sensor or PCM which is intermittently shorted, open, or skewed is possible, yet very unlikely.
  2. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability conditions.
  3. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 228

Scheme 228: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1112: IAT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Intake Air Temperature (IAT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor. The IAT sensor has a signal circuit and a low reference circuit. The IAT sensor measures the temperature of the air entering the engine. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the IAT signal circuit. When the IAT sensor is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the air temperature increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the IAT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the IAT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an intermittent low IAT signal voltage, indicating a high temperature, DTC P1112 sets.

  1. DTCs P0112, P0500, P0502, and P0503 are not set.
  2. The engine run time is more than 45 seconds.
  3. The vehicle speed is more than 25 MPH.
  4. The ECT sensor parameter is less than 257° F (125° C).

The PCM detects that the IAT sensor parameter is more than 252° F (128° C) intermittently for a calibrated amount of time.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. An IAT sensor or PCM which is intermittently shorted, open, or skewed is possible, yet very unlikely.
  2. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability complaints.
  3. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 229

Scheme 229: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1114: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT LOW VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor, that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the ECT signal circuit. When the ECT is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the ECT increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the ECT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the ECT signal circuit. If the PCM detects an excessively low ECT signal voltage, which is a high temperature indication, this Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.

Engine run time is more than 10 seconds.

The PCM detects an ECT of more than 139°C (282°F), as measured by the ECT sensor, and the intermittent condition exists for a calibrated amount of time.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. An ECT sensor or PCM which is intermittently shorted, open, or skewed is possible, yet very unlikely.
  2. An intermittent short to ground in the ECT sensor signal circuit could result in a DTC P1114.
  3. Use the Temperature vs Resistance Value scale in order to test the coolant sensor at various temperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of a skewed sensor. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability complaints. See appropriate SENSOR OPERATING RANGE CHARTS article.
  4. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 230

Scheme 230: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1115: ECT SENSOR CIRCUIT - INTERMITTENT HIGH VOLTAGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is a variable resistor, sometimes called a thermistor, that measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies 5 volts to the ECT signal circuit. When the ECT is cold, the sensor resistance is high. When the ECT increases, the sensor resistance lowers. With high sensor resistance, the PCM detects a high voltage on the ECT signal circuit. With lower sensor resistance, the PCM detects a lower voltage on the ECT signal circuit, if the PCM detects an excessively high signal voltage, which is a low temperature indication, this Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) will set.

Engine run time is more than 60 seconds.

The PCM detects an ECT of less than -36°F (-38°C), as measured by the ECT sensor for a calibrated amount of time.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. An ECT sensor or PCM which is intermittently shorted, open, or skewed is possible, yet very unlikely.
  2. An intermittent open or short to voltage in the ECT sensor signal circuit could result in a DTC P1115.
  3. Use the Temperature vs Resistance Value scale in order to test the coolant sensor at various temperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of a skewed sensor. A skewed sensor could result in poor driveability complaints. See appropriate SENSOR OPERATING RANGE CHARTS article.
  4. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

Scheme 231

Scheme 231: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1125: ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSORS OUT OF RANGE OR DISAGREE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor is mounted on the accelerator pedal assembly. The sensor is actually 3 individual APP sensors within 1 housing. Three separate signal circuits are used in order to connect the accelerator pedal sensor assembly, and the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

If only 1 APP sensor DTC is set, the redundant APP systems allow the TAC system to continue operating normally. This DTC sets if the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) detects a condition with more than 1 APP sensor. One APP sensor DTC will not cause the Reduced Engine Power message to be displayed. 2 APP sensor DTCs for the same sensor also will not cause the Reduced Engine Power message to be displayed. However, if two or more DTCs are set involving more than 1 APP sensor, this DTC will set and the Reduced Engine Power message is displayed.

  1. DTCs P1517 or P1518 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is greater than 5.23 volts.
  1. Two or more APP sensors are out of range or all 3 APP sensors disagree or 1 APP sensor is out of range, and the other 2 APP sensors disagree.
  2. All of the above conditions present for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. The APP sensor 1 and the Throttle Position (TP) sensor 1, 5-volt reference circuits are internally connected within the TAC module.
  3. The APP sensor 2 and the TP sensor 2, 5-volt reference circuits are internally connected within the TAC module.
  4. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Remember this if you review the information stored in Captured Info.
  5. If an intermittent condition is suspected, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The number below refer to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 When the problems are corrected which are causing the APP sensor DTCs to set, the status of this DTC will change to history.

Scheme 232

Scheme 232: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1133: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT SWITCHING - BANK 1, SENSOR 1 & DTC P1153: HO2S CIRCUIT - INSUFFICIENT SWITCHING - BANK 2, SENSOR 1

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

Note. For HO2S identification (Scheme 148)

Heated Oxygen Sensors (HO2S) are used for fuel control and post catalyst monitoring. Each HO2S compared the oxygen content of the surrounding air with the oxygen content in the exhaust stream. The HO2S must reach operating temperature to provide an accurate voltage signal. Heating elements inside the HO2S minimize the time required for the sensors to reach operating temperature. The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) supplies the HO2S with a reference, or bias, voltage of about 450 mV. When the engine is first started the PCM operates in open loop, ignoring the HO2S voltage signal. Once the HO2S reaches operating temperature and closed loop is achieved, the HO2S generates a voltage within a range of 0-1000 mV that fluctuates above and below bias voltage. High HO2S voltage indicates a rich exhaust stream; low HO2S voltage indicates a lean exhaust stream. This diagnostic will only run once per ignition cycle. The PCM monitors the number or rich-to-lean and lean-to-rich transitions. A transition is defined as, the HO2S voltage changes fro above 625 mV to below 250 mV or from below 250 mV to above 625 mV. If the PCM detects that the number or transitions were less than a specified value, DTCs P1133 or P1153 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0106, P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, P0116, P0117, P0118, P0120, P0131, P0132, P0134, P0135, P0151, P0152, P0154, P0155, P0200, P0220, P0300, P0442, P0446, P0452, P0453, P0455, P0496, P1125, P1258, P1514, P1515, P1516, P1518, P2108, or P2135 are not set.
  2. The Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor is more than 149°F (65°C).
  3. The engine run time is more than 160 seconds.
  4. The Evaporative (EVAP) emissions purge solenoid command is more than 1 percent.
  5. The mass airflow (MAF) sensor is between 23-50 g/s.
  6. The engine speed is between 1200-3000 RPM.
  7. For vehicles with TAC, the TP indicated angle is 5 percent more than the value observed at idle.
  8. The loop status is Closed.
  9. The ignition 1 signal voltage is between 10-18 volts.
  10. The fuel tank level remaining is more than 10 percent.
  11. The scan tool output controls are not active.
  12. The above conditions are met for 50 seconds.

The PCM detects that the affected HO2S lean-to-rich or rich-to-lean transitions are less than a calibrated value.

  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) on the second consecutive ignition cycle that the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The first time the diagnostic fails, the control module stores this information in the Failure Records. If the diagnostic reports a failure on the second consecutive ignition cycle, the control module records the operating conditions at the time of the failure. The control module writes the operating conditions to the Freeze Frame and updates the Failure Records.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 If the voltage is varying above and below the specified value, the condition is not present.

Scheme 233

Scheme 233: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 234

Scheme 234

DTC P1172: SECONDARY FUEL PUMP TRANSFER MALFUNCTION

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The secondary fuel pump is located in the rear fuel tank. The secondary fuel pump is powered by a secondary fuel pump relay. Fuel is transferred from the rear fuel tank to the front fuel tank in order to ensure all of the usable fuel volume is available to the primary fuel pump. The secondary fuel pump relay supply voltage is received from the primary fuel pump relay when the primary fuel pump is energized. The secondary fuel pump relay ground is controlled by the Powertrain Control Module (PCM). The secondary fuel pump diagnostic runs only at idle. If the PCM commands the secondary fuel pump ON and a predetermined change inn both the front and rear fuel level sensors does not occur, DTC P1172 sets.

  1. DTCs P0461, P0462, P0463, P1431, P1432, P1433 are not set.
  2. The vehicle speed is 0 MPH.
  3. The engine has been idling for more than 2 minutes and 20 seconds.
  4. The primary fuel level is less than 15.8 gal. (60 L).
  5. The secondary fuel level is more than 2.6 gal. (3 L).
  6. The above conditions are met for 20 seconds before the secondary pump is commanded ON.
  7. The secondary fuel pump is commanded ON for 120 seconds.

The PCM does not detect a change of 1.06 gal. (4 L) in both the primary and secondary fuel level sensors with the secondary pump commanded ON for 120 seconds.

  1. The PCM stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The PCM records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The PCM stores this information in the Failure Records.
  1. A last test failed, or current DTC, clears when the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A history DTC will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Use a scan tool in order to clear the DTC.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step tests the supply voltage circuit of the secondary fuel pump relay.
  2. 4 This step verifies the secondary fuel pump operation. Listen for an audible sound as the secondary fuel pump relay harness connector is jumpered.
  3. 5 This step verifies that there is adequate fuel in the rear fuel tank. The rear fuel tank sensor voltage must be above 1 volt in order to continue.
  4. 7 This step tests the secondary fuel pumps ability to transfer fuel. The rear fuel level sensor voltage should decrease while the secondary fuel pump is ON.
  5. 8 This step tests for a short to ground on the control circuit of the secondary fuel pump relay.
  6. 9 This step tests for a short to voltage on the control circuit of the secondary fuel pump relay.
  7. 10 This step verifies the secondary fuel pump relay operation. An audible click should be heard as the secondary fuel pump relay control circuit is grounded. The secondary fuel pump should turn ON as the fuel pump relay control circuit is grounded.

Scheme 235

Scheme 235: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 236

Scheme 236

Scheme 237

Scheme 237

DTC P1258: ENGINE OVER-TEMPERATURE CONDITION

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) used the Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) sensor to monitor the engine for an over temperature condition. This condition occurs when the coolant temperature is above 270°F (132°C). When an over temperature condition is present, DTC P1258 will set. The PCM will disable 2 groups of 4 cylinders by turning OFF the fuel injectors. By switching between the 2 groups of cylinders, the PCM is able to reduce the temperature of the coolant.

  1. DTCs P0117, P0118, P1114, and P1115 are not active.
  2. The engine is running.

The engine coolant temperature is above 270°F (132°C) for 10 seconds or more.

  1. The PCM will illuminate the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) during the first trip in which the diagnostic test has been run and failed.
  2. The PCM will signal the IPC to turn ON the Service Engine Soon indicator.
  3. The PCM will alternately disable 2 groups of 4 cylinders by turning OFF the fuel injectors.
  4. The PCM will store conditions which were present when the DTC set as Freeze Frame and File Records data.
  1. The PCM will turn the MIL OFF after 3 consecutive trips that the diagnostic has been run and passes.
  2. The History DTC will clear after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles have occurred without a malfunction.
  3. The DTC can be cleared by using the scan tool Clear DTC Information function.

Scheme 238

Scheme 238: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1380: EBCM DTC DETECTED ROUGH ROAD DATA UNSTABLE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) detects engine misfire events by monitoring variations in crankshaft rotation speed. Wheel speed changes caused by rough road conditions can cause changes in crankshaft speed. By monitoring the wheel speed sensors, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) can determine if the vehicle is operating on a rough road. If the ABS is detecting a rough road condition severe enough to effect misfire detection, a rough road signal is sent to the PCM on the serial data circuit. If DTC P0300 is set and the rough road information is not available due to an ABS malfunction, DTC P1380 will set.

  1. DTCs P0101, P0102, P0103, P0120, P0335, P0336, or P0742 are not set.
  2. The vehicle speed is more than 10 MPH.
  3. The engine load is less than 60 percent.
  4. The engine misfire is detected and DTC P0300 set.
  5. The engine speed is less than 3200 RPM.

An ABS malfunction exists preventing the PCM from receiving rough road detection data.

  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 1 Service the ABS before diagnosing for a misfire, because an actual engine misfire may or may not exist. The following 2 examples illustrate how this DTC can be set with or without an actual engine misfire: There was an actual engine misfire during an ABS malfunction. The vehicle operator drove on a rough road, the ABS could not detect this due to a malfunction, and the PCM interpreted the variations in crankshaft speed caused by the rough road as a misfire.

Scheme 239

Scheme 239: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1381: MISFIRE DETECTED - NO EBCM/PCM SERIAL DATA

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) detects engine misfire events by monitoring variations in the crankshaft rotation speed. Wheel speed changes caused by rough road conditions can cause changes in crankshaft speed. By monitoring the wheel speed sensors, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) can determine if the vehicle is operating on a rough road. If the ABS is detecting a rough road condition severe enough to effect misfire detection, a rough road signal is sent to the PCM on the serial data circuit. If DTC P0300 is set and the rough road information is not available due to and ABS malfunction, DTC P1381 will set.

  1. The engine load is less than 60 percent.
  2. The engine speed is less than 3200 RPM.
  3. The vehicle speed is more than 10 MPH.
  4. Engine misfire is detected and DTC P0300 is set.
  1. A serial data malfunction exists preventing the PCM from receiving rough road detection data.
  2. The above conditions are met for 20 seconds.
  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. The driver information center, if equipped, may display a message.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 1 This step will diagnose a malfunction in the serial data circuits.

Scheme 240

Scheme 240: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1514: CALCULATED VS ACTUAL AIRFLOW CORRELATION HIGH

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Powertrain Control Module (PCM) uses the following readings in order to calculate the predicted Mass Air Flow (MAF) rate

  1. The Throttle Position (TP).
  2. The Barometric (BARO) pressure.
  3. The Intake Air Temperature (IAT).
  4. The engine RPM.

The PCM compares the predicted MAF value to the actual MAF value, and to the speed density calculation in order to verify the proper throttle operation.

  1. DTCs P0601, P0602, P0604, P0606, P1515, P1516, P1517, or P1518 are not set.
  2. The following DTCs are not active at the same time: P1120, P1220 and P1221.
  3. The following DTCs are not active at the same time: P1120 and P1220.
  4. The engine operates longer than 1 second.
  5. The engine speed is greater than 500 RPM.
  1. The PCM detects that the difference between the actual airflow (MAF) and the Speed Density calculated air flow is greater than expected.
  2. All of the above conditions met for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the throttle blade for being broken, bent, or missing.
  2. Inspect the Throttle Position (TP) sensor for proper installation. A sensor that is mis-aligned could set this DTC.
  3. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  4. Physically and visually inspect the throttle body assembly and correct any problems that you observe. Manually move the throttle blade from closed to Wide Open Throttle (WOT). You should not need to use excess force. The throttle blade should move smoothly through the full range and then should independently return to a slightly open position.
  5. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  6. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The number below refers to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.

Scheme 241

Scheme 241: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P1515: PREDICTED VS ACTUAL THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION ERROR

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The commanded Throttle Position (TP), based on Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and possibly other limiting factors, is compared to the actual TP. The 2 values should be within a calibrated range of each other. Both the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module redundantly monitor the commanded and actual TP. This DTC sets if the PCM detects an out-of-range condition between commanded and actual pedal position.

  1. DTCs P0601, P0602, P0604, P0606, P1516, P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The following DTCs are not active at the same time: P0120, P0220 and P2135.
  3. The following DTCs are not active at the same time: P0120 and P0220.
  4. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  5. The ignition voltage is greater than 8.5 volts.
  6. The TAC system is not in the battery saver mode.
  1. The PCM detects that the commanded and actual throttle positions are not within a calibrated range of each other.
  2. All above conditions met for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect for mechanical concerns or binding that may be temperature related. Components may not move freely in extreme heat or cold due to the presence of contaminants or ice formation.
  2. Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  3. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  4. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 5 If the TP indicated angle does not follow the movement of the throttle blade, and no TP sensor DTCs are set, there is a mechanical condition with the throttle shaft or the TP sensor.
  2. 16 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.

Scheme 242

Scheme 242: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 243

Scheme 243

DTC P1516: PREDICTED VS ACTUAL THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION ERROR

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The predicted Throttle Position (TP), based on Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) and other limiting factors, is compared to the Actual throttle position. The 2 values should be within a calibrated range of each other. Both the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) and the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module redundantly monitor the predicted and actual throttle position. This DTC sets if the PCM detects an out of range condition between the predicted and actual throttle position.

  1. DTC P1518 is not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is greater than 5.23 volts.
  4. The TAC system is not in the battery saver mode.
  1. The TAC module detects that the predicted and actual throttle positions are not within a calibrated range of each other or the PCM and the TAC cannot determine throttle position or both TP sensors are invalid.
  2. All of the above conditions met for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. Verify that the starting and charging systems are operating properly. Low system voltage can cause this DTC to set.
  3. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  4. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 7 If the TP indicated angle does not follow the movement of the throttle blade, and no TP sensor DTCs are set, there is a mechanical condition with the throttle shaft or the TP sensor.
  2. 18 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.

Scheme 244

Scheme 244: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 245

Scheme 245

DTC P1517: TAC MODULE PROCESSOR FAULT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module contains data which is essential for proper TAC system operation. The TAC module continuously tests the integrity of this data. When the TAC module is unable to write or read data to and from random access memory (RAM), or the TAC module is unable to correctly read data from the flash memory or an internal TAC module processor fault is detected, this DTC sets.

  1. DTC P1518 is not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is greater than 6 volts.
  1. The TAC module determines that an internal data test did not pass.
  2. All above conditions met for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

The number below refer to the step number in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.
  1. Did you perform the Diagnostic System Check-Engine Controls? If yes, go to next step. If no, see «DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM CHECK - ENGINE CONTROLS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
  2. Replace the TAC module. See appropriate REMOVAL, OVERHAUL & INSTALLATION article. After repair, go to next step.
  3. Clear the DTCs with a scan tool. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds. Start the engine. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running DTC. Does the DTC run and pass? If yes, go to next step. If no, go to step 2 .
  4. Observe the stored information, Capture Info with a scan tool. Does the scan tool display any DTCs that you have not diagnosed? If yes, see «DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__diagnostic-trouble-code-definitions) . If no, system is okay.
  1. Verify that the starting and charging systems are operating properly. Low system voltage can cause this DTC to set.
  2. Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  3. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

DTC P1518: TAC MODULE SERIAL DATA FAULT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module and the Powertrain Control Module (PCM) communicate via a dedicated serial data circuit. This serial data circuit is separate from any other serial data circuit on the vehicle. Accurate transmitting and receiving of serial data requires not only good circuit integrity but also adequate system voltage. This diagnostic test monitors the accuracy of the serial data transmitted between the TAC module and the PCM. If the PCM detects a loss of data or invalid data, this DTC sets.

  1. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  2. The ignition voltage is greater than 5.23 volts.
  1. Invalid or missing serial data messages are detected for a predetermined amount of time.
  2. All of the above conditions met for less than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode; or, under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  4. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.

DTC P1518 sets

  1. If the battery voltage is low. If the customer's concern is slow cranking or no crank because battery voltage is low, ignore DTC P1518. Clear any DTCs from memory that may have set from the low battery voltage condition.
  2. When there is a short to battery voltage on the TAC module ground circuit. Inspect the fuses for the circuits that are in the TAC module harness, (i.e., cruise or brake). An inspection of the fuses may lead you to the circuit that is shorted to the TAC module ground circuit.
  3. If the TAC module ignition feed circuit is shorted to a battery voltage supply circuit. The TAC module stays powered-up when the ignition switch is turned OFF. When the ignition switch is turned ON, the TAC module is powered-up before the PCM. DTC P1518 sets because no communication is detected by the TAC module from the PCM. Inspect related circuits for being shorted to a battery voltage supply circuit.

Inspect the TAC module power and ground circuits and the TAC module/PCM serial data circuits for intermittent connections.

Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.

When the TAC module detects a problem within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

For an Intermittent condition, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step determines if the IGN relay is supplying a voltage to the ETC fuse.
  2. 5 Increasing the engine speed to 3000 RPM aids in locating a shorted throttle actuator motor control circuit. Depending on the polarity of the throttle actuator motor transistors, this DTC may not set with a fault in the control circuits. The throttle actuator motor is a bi-directional DC motor. Raising the engine speed changes the polarity of the transistors in the throttle actuator motor. This occurs because 1 set of the transistors are low, 0 volts, and the other set are high, battery voltage. Therefore, if 1 set of transistors are at a low voltage and the corresponding circuit is shorted low, DTC P1518 will not set. When the polarity of the transistors change this DTC sets. If this DTC does not Fail This ignition, continue to monitor this DTC status while moving related harnesses and connectors.
  3. 29 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.

Scheme 246

Scheme 246: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 247

Scheme 247

Scheme 248

Scheme 248

Scheme 249

Scheme 249

DTC P2108: TAC MODULE PROCESSOR FAULT

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module contains data which is essential for proper TAC system operation. The TAC module continuously tests the integrity of this data. When the TAC module is unable to write or read data to and from random access memory (RAM), or the TAC module is unable to correctly read data from the flash memory or and internal TAC module processor fault is detected, this DTC sets.

  1. DTC P1518 is not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is greater than 6 volts.
  1. The TAC module determines than an internal data test did not pass.
  2. The above condition is met for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostics fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode.
  4. Under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  5. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns off the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL and the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Verify that the starting and charging systems are operating properly. Low system voltage can cause this DTC to set.
  2. Inspect the TAC module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  3. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing an individual conditions may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 4 Locating and repairing an individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC.

Scheme 250

Scheme 250: Diagnostic Procedure

DTC P2120: APP SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor 1 is a potentiometer type sensor with the following 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The control module provides the APP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensor then provides the control module a signal voltage proportional to pedal movement. The APP sensor 1 signal voltage is low at rest and increases as the pedal is depressed. When the control module detects that the APP sensor 1 signal or APP sensor 5-volt reference voltage is outside the predetermined range, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P0601, P0602, P1518, or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. The APP sensor 1 voltage is less than 0.24 volts or more than 4.49 volts.
  2. The 5-volt reference is less than 4.54 volts or more than 5.21 volts.
  3. One of the above conditions is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module stored the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. If one or more APP sensor DTCs are set, the following occurs: The control module commands Reduced Engine Power mode. The APP indicated angle is limited to a predetermined value to limit the amount or throttle control. The APP indicated angle is limited to 0 percent. The control module only allows the engine to idle. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  3. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 12 This test isolates whether the short is to another TAC system circuit in the harness or within the TAC module.
  2. 26 When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

Scheme 251

Scheme 251: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 252

Scheme 252

Scheme 253

Scheme 253

DTC P2121: APP SENSOR CIRCUITS OUT OF CORRELATION

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor 1 is a potentiometer type sensor with the following 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The control module provides the APP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensor then provides the control module a signal voltage proportional to pedal movement. The APP sensor 1 signal voltage is low at rest and increases as the pedal is depressed. The APP sensor 2 signal voltage is also low at rest and increases as the pedal is depressed. When the control module detects that the APP sensor 1 signal and the APP sensor 2 signal circuits are out of correlation, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P0606, P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition volage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. APP sensor 1 disagrees with APP sensor 2 by more than 10.5 percent.
  2. The above condition is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module stored the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. If one or more APP sensor DTCs are set, the following occurs: The control module commands Reduced Engine Power mode. The APP indicated angle is limited to a predetermined value to limit the amount or throttle control. The APP indicated angle is limited to 0 percent. The control module only allows the engine to idle. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  3. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 This step determines if a communication condition exists.
  2. 5 This step isolates an internal APP sensor failure. The condition may only occur at a certain accelerator pedal position. Monitoring the APP angles for sensor 2 and sensor 3 is an accurate way of verifying the actual position of the pedal. The APP angles for all 3 sensors should be within a set percent of each other. If the pedal is at rest, the APP angle for all 3 sensors should be 0 percent. If the pedal is fully depressed, all APP angles should be 100 percent.
  3. 6 The APP sensor 1 shares a common 5-volt reference circuit with the throttle position (TP) sensor 1. Monitoring the TP sensor 1 voltage aids in diagnosing the APP sensor 5-volt reference and low reference circuits. If the scan tool displays near 0 volts, the circuits are OK.
  4. 9 With the TAC module still connected, this test will help determine a short to the signal circuit either within the TAC module or wiring.
  5. 10 This step determines whether the TAC module or a short circuit is causing the condition.
  6. 19 When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set addition DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

Scheme 254

Scheme 254: Diagnostic Procedures

Scheme 255

Scheme 255

DTC P2125: APP SENSOR 2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) sensor 1 is a potentiometer type sensor with the following 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The control module provides the APP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The APP sensor then provides the control module a signal voltage proportional to pedal movement. The APP sensor 1 signal voltage is low at rest and increases as the pedal is depressed. When the control module detects that the APP sensor 2 signal or the APP sensor 5-volt reference voltage is outside the predetermined range, this DTC sets.

  1. DTCs P0601, P0602, P0606, P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. The APP sensor 2 voltage is less than 0.24 volt or more than 4.49 volts.
  2. The 5-volt reference is less than 4.54 volts or more than 5.21 volts.
  3. One of the above conditions is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module stores the DTC information into memory when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) will not illuminate.
  3. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Failure Records.
  4. If one or more APP sensor DTCs are set, the following occurs: The control module commands Reduced Engine Power mode. the APP indicated angle is limited to a predetermined value to limit the amount of throttle control. The APP indicated angle is limited to 0 percent. The control module only allows the engine to idle. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. A current DTC Last Test Failed clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  2. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other non-emission related diagnostic.
  3. Clear the DTC with the scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs or water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  3. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. 2 The throttle position (TP) senor 2 and the APP sensor 2 share a common 5-volt reference source. Diagnose DTC P0220 first if P0220 is also set.
  2. 18 This test determines whether or not the TAC module can recognize a change in signal voltage.
  3. 19 There are 2 separate 5-volt reference sources within the TAC module. The TP sensor 1 and APP sensor 1 share one 5-volt reference source. The TP sensor 2 and the APP sensor 2 share another common 5-volt reference source. The test determines whether the signal circuit is shorted to any one of the 5-volt reference circuits. If a short exists, the corresponding sensor voltage will be pulled low.
  4. 20 The previous step found the signal circuit and a 5-volt reference circuit shorted together. This test isolates whether the short is in the harness or within the TAC module.
  5. 26 When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

Scheme 256

Scheme 256: Diagnostic Procedure

Scheme 257

Scheme 257

Scheme 258

Scheme 258

DTC P2135: TP SENSOR SIGNALS 1 & 2 DISAGREE OR OUTSIDE PREDETERMINED RANGE

Note. To locate components, see COMPONENT LOCATIONS . For circuit reference, see WIRING DIAGRAMS . For connector terminal identification, see CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION . If an intermittent condition exists, see INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM. If testing requires component removal or replacement, see appropriate REMOVAL & INSTALLATION article.

The Throttle Position (TP) sensors 1 and 2 are potentiometer type sensors each with 3 circuits

  1. A 5-volt reference circuit.
  2. A low reference circuit.
  3. A signal circuit.

The TP sensor are used to determine the throttle plate angle for various engine management systems. The control module provides each TP sensor a 5-volt reference circuit and a low reference circuit. The TP sensors then provide the control module with signal voltage proportional to throttle plate movement. Both TP sensor signal voltages are low at closed throttle and increase as the throttle opens. When the control module detects that TP sensor 1 signal and TP sensor 2 signals disagree or signal voltages are outside the predetermined range, this DTC set.

  1. DTCs P1518 or P2108 are not set.
  2. The ignition switch is in the crank or run position.
  3. The ignition voltage is more than 5.23 volts.
  1. The TP sensor 2 disagrees with the TP sensor 1 by more than 7.5 percent.
  2. The above condition is present for more than 1 second.
  1. The control module illuminates the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) when the diagnostic runs and fails.
  2. The control module records the operating conditions at the time the diagnostic fails. The control module stores this information in the Freeze Frame and/or the Failure Records.
  3. The control module commands the TAC system to operate in the Reduced Engine Power mode.
  4. Under certain conditions the control module commands the engine OFF.
  5. The message center displays Reduced Engine Power.
  1. The control module turns OFF the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) after 3 consecutive ignition cycles that the diagnostic runs and does not fail.
  2. A current DTC, Last Test Failed, clears when the diagnostic runs and passes.
  3. A history DTC clears after 40 consecutive warm-up cycles, if no failures are reported by this or any other emission related diagnostic.
  4. Clear the MIL/DTC with a scan tool.
  1. Inspect the Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) module connectors for signs of water intrusion. If water intrusion occurs, multiple DTCs may set without any circuit or component conditions found during diagnostic testing.
  2. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
  3. For an Intermittent condition, see «INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS»(/cadillac/escalade/gmt800-2001-2006/remont/testing-diagnostics/#engine-controls-self-diagnostics-48l-53l-60l-flex-fuel-gasoline__intermittent-conditions) under SELF-DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.

The numbers below refer to the step numbers in the diagnostic procedure.

  1. When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than 1 TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing 1 individual condition may correct more than 1 DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.

The number below refers to the step number on the diagnostic table.

  1. 21: When the TAC module detects a condition within the TAC system, more than one TAC system related DTC may set. This is due to the many redundant tests run continuously on this system. Locating and repairing one individual condition may correct more than one DTC. Disconnecting components during testing may set additional DTCs. Remember this if you review the stored information in Capture Info.
StepActionYesNo
Schematic Reference: Engine Controls Schematics Connector End View Reference: Engine Controls Connector End Views or Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Connector End Views
1Did you perform the Diagnostic System Check - Engine Controls?Go to Step 2Go to Diagnostic System Check - Engine Controls
2Is DTC U0107 set?Go to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ListGo to Step 3
3Turn ON the ignition, with the engine OFF. Observe the throttle position (TP) sensor 1 and 2 Agree/Disagree parameter with a scan tool. Does the scan tool TP sensor 1 and 2 Agree/Disagree parameter indicate Disagree?Go to Step 5Go to Step 4
4Remove the air inlet duct from the throttle body. Disconnect the throttle body harness connector. Connect the jumper wires between the TP sensor terminals of the throttle body harness connector and the corresponding TP sensor terminals of the throttle body. Observe the TP sensor 1 and 2 with a scan tool. Slowly open the throttle blade to wide open throttle (WOT) and back to the closed throttle position several times by hand. Does the TP sensor Agree/Disagree parameter change from Agree to Disagree during the above test?Go to Step 18Go to Diagnostic Aids
5Disconnect the TP sensor harness connector. Disconnect the throttle actuator control (TAC) module harness connectors. Test the TP sensor 1 5-volt reference circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 6
6Test for a short between the TP sensor 1 5-volt reference circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 7
7Test the TP sensor 1 signal circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 8
8Test for a short between the TP sensor 1 signal circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 9
9Test the TP sensor 1 low reference circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 10
10Test for a short between the TP sensor 1 low reference circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 11
11Test the TP sensor 2 5-volt reference circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 12
12Test for a short between the TP sensor 2 5-volt reference circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 13
13Test the TP sensor 2 signal circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 14
14Test for a short between the TP sensor 2 signal circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 15
15Test the TP sensor 2 low reference circuit for resistance with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 16
16Test for a short between the TP sensor 2 low reference circuit and all other TAC module circuits with a DMM. Refer to Circuit Testing and Wiring Repairs in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 17
17Inspect for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the harness connector of the TAC module. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections and Repairing Connector Terminals in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 18
18Inspect for an intermittent and for a poor connection at the harness connector of the throttle body. Refer to Testing for Intermittent Conditions and Poor Connections and Repairing Connector Terminals in Wiring Systems. Did you find and correct the condition?Go to Step 20Go to Step 19
19Replace the throttle body assembly. Refer to Throttle Body Assembly Replacement . Did you complete the replacement?Go to Step 20
20Clear the DTCs with a scan tool. Turn OFF the ignition for 30 seconds. Start the engine. Operate the vehicle within the Conditions for Running the DTC. You may also operate the vehicle within the conditions that you observed from the Freeze Frame/Failure Records. Did the DTC fail this ignition?Go to Step 2Go to Step 21
21Observe the Capture Info with a scan tool. Are there any DTCs that have not been diagnosed?Go to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ListSystem OK

DTC P2135

AVALANCHE

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

ESCALADE

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

ESCALADE ESV

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

ESCALADE EXT

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

HUMMER H2

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SIERRA - 1500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SIERRA - 2500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SIERRA - 2500HD

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SIERRA - 3500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SILVERADO - 1500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SILVERADO - 2500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SILVERADO - 2500HD

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SILVERADO - 3500

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

SUBURBAN

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

TAHOE

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

YUKON

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

YUKON XL

See ENGINE PERFORMANCE in SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAMS article in ELECTRICAL.

See also:
NO-START DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLE SHOOTING - NO CODES - 4.8L, 5.3L & 6.0L "C", "G", "H", "K", "N", "S" & "T" SERIES - FLEX FUEL & GASOLINE
SYMPTOMS
COOLING SYSTEM TROUBLE SHOOTING
MODEL IDENTIFICATION
DIAGNOSTIC STARTING POINT - ENGINE CONTROLS
VEHICLE DATA RECORDER
POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE DEFINITIONS
DTC P0601-P0607, P1600, P1621, P1627, P1680, P1681, P1683 & P2610: PCM MEMORY
INTERMITTENT CONDITIONS
DTC P0315: CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR VARIATION NOT LEARNED
P0101
P0102
P0103
P0106
P0107
P0108
P0112
P0113
P0116
P0117
P0118
P0120
P0125
P0128
P0131
P0132
P0133
P0134
P0135
P0137
P0138
P0140
P0141
P0169
P0171
P0172
P0178
P0179
P0200
P0220
P0230
P0300
P0325
P0327
P0335
P0336
P0341
P0342
P0343
P0351-P0358
P0420
P0442
P0443
P0446
P0449
P0452
P0453
P0455
P0496
P0506
P0507
P0641
P0650
P0651
P1106
P1107
P1111
P1112
P1114
P1115
P1125
P1133
P1172
P1258
P1380
P1381
P1514
P1515
P1516
P1517
P1518
P2108
P2120
P2121
P2125
P2135
CODE TYPES